Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Convex Optimization

556 missions · 339 completed

Missions

Open217Completed339All556
Machine LearningOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Sample Size Selection in Optimization Methods for Machine Learning 1: With Batch Sizes n_k ≥ a^k, Dynamic Batch Steepest Descent Converges Linearly in Expectation, E[J(w_k) − J(w*)] ≤ Cρ^kResearch Paper

Motivation

Training a model in machine learning means minimizing an expected loss over a data distribution, using a finite sample from it. Two families of methods dominate. Stochastic gradient methods step along the gradient of the loss at one data point: each step is cheap, but the noise forces small steps and many sequential iterations. Batch methods average the gradient over a large set of points: each step is accurate and parallelizes well, but costs a pass over the data. Bottou and Bousquet (The tradeoffs of large scale learning, NIPS 2007) compared the two by the total work needed to reach accuracy ϵ\epsilonϵ and concluded that stochastic gradient descent is preferable in large-scale learning.

Byrd, Chin, Nocedal and Wu (Sample size selection in optimization methods for machine learning, Math. Program. 2012) analyse a third option: a dynamic batch method, which takes gradient steps on mini-batches whose size grows over the run. A small batch makes early progress cheap; a large batch later makes the steps accurate. Their Theorem 4.2 shows that when the batch size grows geometrically, steepest descent with a fixed step converges linearly in expectation, and their Corollary 4.3 derives from it a total work bound of the same order as stochastic gradient descent. The analysis underlies a line of work on adaptive sampling and variance-controlled batch methods (for example Friedlander and Schmidt, Hybrid deterministic-stochastic methods for data fitting, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 2012; Bottou, Curtis and Nocedal, Optimization methods for large-scale machine learning, SIAM Review 2018, §5.2).

Setting

Let (Z,P)(Z,P)(Z,P) be a probability space of data points zzz; in the paper z=(x,y)z=(x,y)z=(x,y) is an input–output pair with distribution P(x,y)P(x,y)P(x,y). The parameter is w∈Rmw\in\mathbb R^mw∈Rm (mmm is the number of variables). A per-sample loss ℓ(w;z)\ell(w;z)ℓ(w;z) is given with gradient ∇ℓ(w;z)\nabla\ell(w;z)∇ℓ(w;z) in www, and the objective is the expected loss (2.1)

J(w)=∫ℓ(w;z) dP(z).J(w)=\int\ell(w;z)\,dP(z).J(w)=∫ℓ(w;z)dP(z).

The gradient of the objective is the expected per-sample gradient, ∇J(w)=∫∇ℓ(w;z) dP(z)\nabla J(w)=\int\nabla\ell(w;z)\,dP(z)∇J(w)=∫∇ℓ(w;z)dP(z).

Uniform convexity (4.2): JJJ is twice continuously differentiable and there are constants 0<λ<L0<\lambda<L0<λ<L with

λ∥d∥22≤dT∇2J(w) d≤L∥d∥22for all w,d.\lambda\|d\|_2^2\le d^T\nabla^2J(w)\,d\le L\|d\|_2^2\qquad\text{for all } w,d .λ∥d∥22​≤dT∇2J(w)d≤L∥d∥22​for all w,d.

Then JJJ has a unique minimizer w∗w^*w∗.

For a random vector X∈RmX\in\mathbb R^mX∈Rm, ∥Var(X)∥1=E∥X−EX∥22\|\mathrm{Var}(X)\|_1=\mathbb E\|X-\mathbb EX\|_2^2∥Var(X)∥1​=E∥X−EX∥22​ is the sum of its componentwise variances. The variance bound (4.22) asks for a constant ω\omegaω with

∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1≤ωfor all w.\|\mathrm{Var}(\nabla\ell(w;\cdot))\|_1\le\omega\qquad\text{for all } w .∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1​≤ωfor all w.

The algorithm. Fix sample sizes nk≥1n_k\ge1nk​≥1 and a starting point w0w_0w0​. At iteration kkk draw a batch SkS_kSk​ of nkn_knk​ points, independently with law PPP and independently of earlier batches, form the batch gradient (4.19)

gk=1nk∑i∈Sk∇ℓ(wk;i),g_k=\frac1{n_k}\sum_{i\in S_k}\nabla\ell(w_k;i),gk​=nk​1​i∈Sk​∑​∇ℓ(wk​;i),

and take the dynamic batch steepest descent step (4.24)

wk+1=wk−1L gk.w_{k+1}=w_k-\frac1L\,g_k .wk+1​=wk​−L1​gk​.

The iterates wkw_kwk​ are random, and expectations below are over all batches.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2

If nk≥akn_k\ge a^knk​≥ak for all kkk, for some a>1a>1a>1, and (4.22) holds, then

E[J(wk)−J(w∗)]≤Cρkfor all k,ρ=max⁡{1−λ/(4L), 1/a}<1,C=max⁡{J(w0)−J(w∗), 2ω/λ}.\mathbb E[J(w_k)-J(w^*)]\le C\rho^k\quad\text{for all }k,\qquad \rho=\max\{1-\lambda/(4L),\,1/a\}<1,\quad C=\max\{J(w_0)-J(w^*),\,2\omega/\lambda\}.E[J(wk​)−J(w∗)]≤Cρkfor all k,ρ=max{1−λ/(4L),1/a}<1,C=max{J(w0​)−J(w∗),2ω/λ}.

The constants are the paper's. The goal also asserts that J(wk)J(w_k)J(wk​) is integrable for every kkk.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. (4.5), p. 8: ∇J(w)T∇J(w)≥λ[J(w)−J(w∗)]\nabla J(w)^T\nabla J(w)\ge\lambda[J(w)-J(w^*)]∇J(w)T∇J(w)≥λ[J(w)−J(w∗)] for every www.
  2. Taylor bound, p. 11: J(w−1Lg)≤J(w)−1L∇J(w)Tg+12L∥g∥2J(w-\frac1Lg)\le J(w)-\frac1L\nabla J(w)^Tg+\frac1{2L}\|g\|^2J(w−L1​g)≤J(w)−L1​∇J(w)Tg+2L1​∥g∥2 for every www and ggg.
  3. (4.25), p. 11: at a fixed point www, with ggg the batch gradient of nnn i.i.d. draws,
E[J(w−1Lg)]≤J(w)−1L∥∇J(w)∥2+12LE∥g∥2,E∥g∥2=∥∇J(w)∥2+∥Var(g)∥1.\mathbb E[J(w-\tfrac1Lg)]\le J(w)-\tfrac1L\|\nabla J(w)\|^2+\tfrac1{2L}\mathbb E\|g\|^2,\qquad \mathbb E\|g\|^2=\|\nabla J(w)\|^2+\|\mathrm{Var}(g)\|_1 .E[J(w−L1​g)]≤J(w)−L1​∥∇J(w)∥2+2L1​E∥g∥2,E∥g∥2=∥∇J(w)∥2+∥Var(g)∥1​.
  1. Variance of the batch gradient, p. 12: ∥Var(g)∥1≤∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1/n\|\mathrm{Var}(g)\|_1\le\|\mathrm{Var}(\nabla\ell(w;\cdot))\|_1/n∥Var(g)∥1​≤∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1​/n.
  2. (4.26), p. 12: E[J(w−1Lg)]≤J(w)−12L∥∇J(w)∥2+12Ln∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1\mathbb E[J(w-\tfrac1Lg)]\le J(w)-\tfrac1{2L}\|\nabla J(w)\|^2+\tfrac1{2Ln}\|\mathrm{Var}(\nabla\ell(w;\cdot))\|_1E[J(w−L1​g)]≤J(w)−2L1​∥∇J(w)∥2+2Ln1​∥Var(∇ℓ(w;⋅))∥1​.
  3. (4.27), p. 12: E[J(w−1Lg)−J(w∗)]≤(1−λ2L)(J(w)−J(w∗))+ω2Ln\mathbb E[J(w-\tfrac1Lg)-J(w^*)]\le(1-\tfrac{\lambda}{2L})(J(w)-J(w^*))+\tfrac{\omega}{2Ln}E[J(w−L1​g)−J(w∗)]≤(1−2Lλ​)(J(w)−J(w∗))+2Lnω​.

Milestones 3–6 are the paper's conditional expectations given wkw_kwk​, stated at a fixed point www with the batch drawn afresh.

Significance

Theorem 4.2 is the convergence guarantee of the dynamic sampling strategy: it says that the noise of a mini-batch gradient does not destroy the linear rate of steepest descent, provided the batch grows geometrically. The rate ρ\rhoρ makes the trade-off explicit: the optimization contracts by 1−λ/(4L)1-\lambda/(4L)1−λ/(4L) per step, the noise by 1/a1/a1/a, and the slower of the two governs. From it the paper's Corollary 4.3 bounds the total number of sample-gradient evaluations to reach E[J(wk)−J(w∗)]≤ϵ\mathbb E[J(w_k)-J(w^*)]\le\epsilonE[J(wk​)−J(w∗)]≤ϵ by O(L/(λϵ))O(L/(\lambda\epsilon))O(L/(λϵ)), which places dynamic batch methods on the same footing as stochastic gradient descent in the Bottou–Bousquet comparison, while keeping the parallelism of batch methods.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge no machine-checked proof exists. A formalization produces a reusable account of the one-iteration analysis of a mini-batch gradient step (descent lemma, variance of an i.i.d. sample mean of random vectors, conditional expectation over a fresh batch), and of the passage from a conditional one-step recursion to an unconditional bound over a run driven by an infinite i.i.d. array. Corollary 4.3 is not part of this mission: it involves O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) bounds, a cost model for gradient evaluations and an iteration count treated as a real number.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of the induction on p. 12 is short. The difficulty is in making the probability rigorous. The iterate wkw_kwk​ is random, and the paper's one-step bound (4.27) is a conditional expectation given wkw_kwk​, with J(wk)J(w_k)J(wk​) on the right-hand side. Turning it into an unconditional recursion requires that the batch of iteration kkk be independent of wkw_kwk​, that wkw_kwk​ be a measurable function of the earlier batches, and that J(wk)J(w_k)J(wk​) and ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2 be integrable at every step, none of which is automatic for a run driven by an infinite array of draws. A naive formalization that treats wkw_kwk​ as a fixed point, or gkg_kgk​ as an abstract random vector with a postulated variance bound, skips exactly this content.

The variance identity for a sample mean of random vectors in Rm\mathbb R^mRm and the bound ∥∇J(w)∥≤L∥w−w∗∥\|\nabla J(w)\|\le L\|w-w^*\|∥∇J(w)∥≤L∥w−w∗∥ from (4.2) are standard but not packaged in this form in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The paper's λ\lambdaλ is written lam (λ is a Lean keyword). (4.2) is ContDiff ℝ 2 J, 0 < lam < L, and the two-sided bound on fderiv ℝ (fderiv ℝ J) w d d.
  • JJJ is defined as the Bochner integral ∫ℓ(w;z) dP(z)\int\ell(w;z)\,dP(z)∫ℓ(w;z)dP(z) for a general per-sample loss ℓ\ellℓ; the paper's linear predictor f(w;x)=wTxf(w;x)=w^Txf(w;x)=wTx and convex loss lll are not used by the theorem and are not assumed. The model assumes: ℓ(w;⋅)\ell(w;\cdot)ℓ(w;⋅) integrable; ∇ℓ(w;z)\nabla\ell(w;z)∇ℓ(w;z) the gradient of ℓ(⋅;z)\ell(\cdot;z)ℓ(⋅;z) at www; (w,z)↦∇ℓ(w;z)(w,z)\mapsto\nabla\ell(w;z)(w,z)↦∇ℓ(w;z) jointly measurable; ∇ℓ(w;⋅)\nabla\ell(w;\cdot)∇ℓ(w;⋅) square-integrable; and ∇J(w)=∫∇ℓ(w;z) dP(z)\nabla J(w)=\int\nabla\ell(w;z)\,dP(z)∇J(w)=∫∇ℓ(w;z)dP(z) (differentiation under the integral, which the paper uses without proof).
  • Sampling with replacement. The paper's (3.5) is sampling without replacement from NNN points; it takes N→∞N\to\inftyN→∞ on p. 5, which "also corresponds to the case of sampling with replacement". The formalization draws every point i.i.d. from PPP: draw iii of iteration kkk is ξk,i\xi_{k,i}ξk,i​ and the law of the whole array is Measure.infinitePi over N×N\mathbb N\times\mathbb NN×N. The finite-population factor (N−nk)/(N−1)(N-n_k)/(N-1)(N−nk​)/(N−1) is not modelled.
  • w∗w^*w∗ is a given minimizer of JJJ; nkn_knk​ are natural numbers with ak≤nka^k\le n_kak≤nk​ (real powers of a real a>1a>1a>1); ω\omegaω is a real number.
  • The goal asserts integrability of J(wk)J(w_k)J(wk​) together with the bound, so the inequality cannot be met by the Bochner integral's value 000 on a non-integrable function. The batch gradient is the mean over nkn_knk​ draws at the current iterate, and wkw_kwk​ is the random run: a goal with an abstract random gkg_kgk​ satisfying a postulated variance bound, or with wkw_kwk​ a deterministic sequence, would not be this theorem.
  • Welcome contributions: the variance of an i.i.d. mean of Rm\mathbb R^mRm-valued random vectors; the descent lemma and gradient-dominance inequality from Hessian bounds; measurability and independence lemmas for processes driven by Measure.infinitePi. All three are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. H. Byrd, G. M. Chin, J. Nocedal, Y. Wu, Sample size selection in optimization methods for machine learning, Mathematical Programming 134 (2012) 127–155. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-012-0572-5
  • L. Bottou, O. Bousquet, The tradeoffs of large scale learning, NIPS 2007. https://papers.nips.cc/paper/3323-the-tradeoffs-of-large-scale-learning
  • M. P. Friedlander, M. Schmidt, Hybrid deterministic-stochastic methods for data fitting, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 34 (2012) A1380–A1405. https://doi.org/10.1137/110830629
  • L. Bottou, F. E. Curtis, J. Nocedal, Optimization methods for large-scale machine learning, SIAM Review 60 (2018) 223–311. https://doi.org/10.1137/16M1080173
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Sample Size Selection in Optimization Methods for Machine Learning 2: Steepest Descent with Gradient Error ‖g_k − ∇J(w_k)‖ ≤ θ‖g_k‖ Contracts J by 1 − βλ/L per StepResearch Paper

Motivation

Training a machine-learning model usually means minimizing an expected or empirical loss J(w)J(w)J(w) over parameters w∈Rmw \in \mathbb{R}^mw∈Rm. Exact gradients of such objectives are expensive, because each one requires a pass over the whole data set; practical methods replace ∇J(wk)\nabla J(w_k)∇J(wk​) by a cheaper approximation gkg_kgk​, for instance a gradient computed on a subsample. This raises a basic question for the analysis of optimization algorithms: how accurate must the approximate gradient be for steepest descent to keep its linear rate of convergence?

Byrd, Chin, Nocedal and Wu (Math. Program. 2012) answer this question with a relative-error condition, and use the answer to motivate a rule that increases the sample size during the run. Their §4.1 treats the deterministic case: the approximations gkg_kgk​ are arbitrary vectors, and only a geometric condition linking gkg_kgk​ to ∇J(wk)\nabla J(w_k)∇J(wk​) is assumed. That deterministic result, Theorem 4.1, is the goal of this mission. The stochastic counterpart (Theorem 4.2, dynamic batch sizes) is a separate mission of the same series.

Relative-error conditions of this kind ("the error is a fixed fraction of the step") appear throughout the literature on inexact gradient and inexact Newton methods (e.g. Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis 2000 on gradient methods with errors), and the condition (4.8) below is the deterministic template for the adaptive sampling tests later developed for stochastic optimization.

Setting

Let J:Rm→RJ : \mathbb{R}^m \to \mathbb{R}J:Rm→R be twice continuously differentiable and uniformly convex: there are constants 0<λ<L0 < \lambda < L0<λ<L such that

λ∥d∥22  ≤  dT∇2J(w) d  ≤  L∥d∥22for all w,d∈Rm.(4.2)\lambda\|d\|_2^2 \;\le\; d^T \nabla^2 J(w)\, d \;\le\; L\|d\|_2^2 \qquad\text{for all } w, d \in \mathbb{R}^m. \tag{4.2}λ∥d∥22​≤dT∇2J(w)d≤L∥d∥22​for all w,d∈Rm.(4.2)

Such a JJJ has a unique minimizer w∗w_*w∗​; following the paper, it is normalized so that J(w∗)=0J(w_*) = 0J(w∗​)=0.

Fix θ∈(0,1)\theta \in (0,1)θ∈(0,1). Given a sequence of vectors g0,g1,…g_0, g_1, \ldotsg0​,g1​,… (the approximate gradients), the fixed-steplength steepest descent iteration is

wk+1=wk−αgk,α=1−θL.(4.1, 4.7)w_{k+1} = w_k - \alpha g_k, \qquad \alpha = \frac{1-\theta}{L}. \tag{4.1, 4.7}wk+1​=wk​−αgk​,α=L1−θ​.(4.1, 4.7)

The approximate gradient at iteration kkk satisfies the relative-error condition if

∥gk−∇J(wk)∥  ≤  θ ∥gk∥.(4.8)\|g_k - \nabla J(w_k)\| \;\le\; \theta\, \|g_k\|. \tag{4.8}∥gk​−∇J(wk​)∥≤θ∥gk​∥.(4.8)

Write

β=(1−θ)22(1+θ)2.(4.9)\beta = \frac{(1-\theta)^2}{2(1+\theta)^2}. \tag{4.9}β=2(1+θ)2(1−θ)2​.(4.9)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (p. 8)

  1. If (4.8) holds at iteration kkk, then
J(wk+1)≤(1−βλL)J(wk).(4.9)J(w_{k+1}) \le \Bigl(1 - \frac{\beta\lambda}{L}\Bigr) J(w_k). \tag{4.9}J(wk+1​)≤(1−Lβλ​)J(wk​).(4.9)
  1. If (4.8) holds at every iteration, then wk→w∗w_k \to w_*wk​→w∗​ (4.10); every k>Lβλ[log⁡(1/ϵ)+log⁡J(w0)]k > \frac{L}{\beta\lambda}[\log(1/\epsilon) + \log J(w_0)]k>βλL​[log(1/ϵ)+logJ(w0​)] satisfies J(wk)<J(w∗)+ϵJ(w_k) < J(w_*) + \epsilonJ(wk​)<J(w∗​)+ϵ (4.11); and
∥gk∥2≤1(1−θ)2 2L2J(w0)λ(1−βλL)k.(4.12)\|g_k\|^2 \le \frac{1}{(1-\theta)^2}\,\frac{2L^2J(w_0)}{\lambda}\Bigl(1-\frac{\beta\lambda}{L}\Bigr)^k. \tag{4.12}∥gk​∥2≤(1−θ)21​λ2L2J(w0​)​(1−Lβλ​)k.(4.12)

The constants are those of the paper and are kept explicit.

Milestones

In the order the paper's proof uses them:

  • (4.5) ∇J(w)T∇J(w)≥λ[J(w)−J(w∗)]\nabla J(w)^T\nabla J(w) \ge \lambda[J(w) - J(w_*)]∇J(w)T∇J(w)≥λ[J(w)−J(w∗​)] and (4.6) J(w)−J(w∗)≥λ2L2∥∇J(w)∥22J(w) - J(w_*) \ge \frac{\lambda}{2L^2}\|\nabla J(w)\|_2^2J(w)−J(w∗​)≥2L2λ​∥∇J(w)∥22​, consequences of (4.2) alone (p. 8);
  • (4.13) (1−θ)∥gk∥≤∥∇J(wk)∥≤(1+θ)∥gk∥(1-\theta)\|g_k\| \le \|\nabla J(w_k)\| \le (1+\theta)\|g_k\|(1−θ)∥gk​∥≤∥∇J(wk​)∥≤(1+θ)∥gk​∥ and (4.14) ∇J(wk)Tgk≥(1−θ)∥gk∥2\nabla J(w_k)^Tg_k \ge (1-\theta)\|g_k\|^2∇J(wk​)Tgk​≥(1−θ)∥gk​∥2 under (4.8) (p. 9);
  • (4.16) the one-step decrease J(wk+1)≤J(wk)−βL∥∇J(wk)∥2J(w_{k+1}) \le J(w_k) - \frac{\beta}{L}\|\nabla J(w_k)\|^2J(wk+1​)≤J(wk​)−Lβ​∥∇J(wk​)∥2 under (4.8) at kkk (p. 9);
  • (4.17) J(wk)≤(1−βλ/L)kJ(w0)J(w_k) \le (1 - \beta\lambda/L)^k J(w_0)J(wk​)≤(1−βλ/L)kJ(w0​) under (4.8) at every earlier iteration (p. 9).

Significance

Theorem 4.1 says that the linear convergence of steepest descent on a uniformly convex function survives arbitrary gradient errors, provided each error is at most a fixed fraction θ\thetaθ of the approximate gradient's own norm. The price is explicit: the per-step contraction factor is 1−β(θ)λ/L1 - \beta(\theta)\lambda/L1−β(θ)λ/L instead of a factor of the form 1−cλ/L1 - c\lambda/L1−cλ/L with an absolute constant ccc, and the iteration bound (4.11) grows like L/(βλ)L/(\beta\lambda)L/(βλ) times a logarithm. Because (4.8) is relative rather than absolute, no a priori bound on the error is needed, and the error may be large far from the solution. In the paper this is the motivation for requiring the sample variance of a subsampled gradient to be small relative to ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2, which leads to the dynamic sample-size rule analysed in §4.2.

The result is proved in the paper (pp. 9–10). No machine-checked proof of it, or of any relative-error inexact gradient method with explicit constants, has been published. A formal proof provides a checked reference statement for inexact first-order methods with the paper's constants, and the milestones (4.5), (4.6), (4.13), (4.14) are reusable facts about strongly convex smooth functions and about relative-error gradient approximations.

Difficulty

Each step is classical, but the proof combines second-order information with metric estimates. The descent estimate (4.15) needs a second-order Taylor bound from the upper Hessian bound in (4.2), which in Lean means passing from a bound on the second Fréchet derivative to a quadratic upper bound on JJJ along a segment. The inequalities (4.5) and (4.6) relate the gradient norm to the optimality gap through the lower and upper Hessian bounds and the minimizer, and must be derived without an explicit averaged Hessian unless one is built. The convergence wk→w∗w_k \to w_*wk​→w∗​ in (4.10) requires turning convergence of the function values into convergence of the iterates, which again uses uniform convexity. Finally, (4.11) is a logarithmic iteration count whose boundary cases (J(w0)=0J(w_0) = 0J(w0​)=0, ϵ≥J(w0)\epsilon \ge J(w_0)ϵ≥J(w0​)) must be handled. A naive reading of the iteration with exact gradients does not apply: the step is (1−θ)/L(1-\theta)/L(1−θ)/L, not 1/L1/L1/L, and the direction −gk-g_k−gk​ is only known to be a descent direction through (4.14).

Formalization scope

The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). Assumption (4.2) is a definition HessianBounds J lam L (with lam for λ\lambdaλ, a Lean keyword): ContDiff ℝ 2 J, 0 < lam < L, and both bounds on the quadratic form fderiv ℝ (fderiv ℝ J) w d d. The gradient is Mathlib's gradient J. The minimizer is a point wstar with J wstar ≤ J w for all w, and J wstar = 0 is a hypothesis of the goal and of (4.17), exactly as in the paper; (4.5) and (4.6) are stated with J(w∗)J(w_*)J(w∗​) and without it. The constant β\betaβ is a definition beta θ; it is never a free variable. The approximate gradients gkg_kgk​ are an arbitrary sequence and nothing is random. The iterates are any sequence with w (k+1) = w k - ((1 - θ) / L) • g k for all k.

The one-step claim (4.9) assumes (4.8) only at the index kkk; (4.10)–(4.12) assume it at every index. (4.11) is stated in the form the proof derives in (4.18): every kkk strictly beyond the bound has J(wk)<ϵJ(w_k) < \epsilonJ(wk​)<ϵ. The logarithm is natural; when J(w0)=0J(w_0) = 0J(w0​)=0 Lean's convention log⁡0=0\log 0 = 0log0=0 applies, which is harmless because every iterate is then optimal. No positivity hypothesis on J(w0)J(w_0)J(w0​) is added.

A trivializing formalization is excluded: the step size is fixed by the paper, β\betaβ and the Hessian bounds are pinned, and the hypotheses are satisfiable, e.g. by J(w)=c2∥w∥2J(w) = \tfrac{c}{2}\|w\|^2J(w)=2c​∥w∥2 with λ<c<L\lambda < c < Lλ<c<L, w∗=0w_* = 0w∗​=0 and gk=∇J(wk)g_k = \nabla J(w_k)gk​=∇J(wk​).

A complete development needs: a second-order Taylor (or mean-value) bound from a Hessian bound, the strong-convexity inequalities (4.5)–(4.6), and elementary real-analysis facts about geometric sequences and logarithms. The milestones (4.5), (4.6), (4.13) and (4.14) are independent of the iteration and reusable. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative proofs with sharper constants stated as separate theorems, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. H. Byrd, G. M. Chin, J. Nocedal, Y. Wu, Sample size selection in optimization methods for machine learning, Mathematical Programming 134 (2012), 127–155. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-012-0572-5
  • D. P. Bertsekas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Gradient convergence in gradient methods with errors, SIAM Journal on Optimization 10 (2000), 627–642. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623497331063
  • L. Bottou, O. Bousquet, The tradeoffs of large scale learning, Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 20 (2008). https://papers.nips.cc/paper/3323-the-tradeoffs-of-large-scale-learning
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Theoretical Computer Science·Captain: marwahaha

Exponential PSD rank of positively shifted matching matricesOpen Problem

Motivation

Semidefinite representations may be smaller than linear descriptions of a polytope. Lower bounds for their matrix size require a factorization obstruction that applies to arbitrary positive-semidefinite factors. The source manuscript presents the surrounding research claim.

Setting

For even n, columns are perfect matchings of the complete graph. Rows comprise edges and odd vertex subsets. The unshifted slack matrix has edge-incidence entries and odd-cut entries |M∩δ(U)|−1. Its real PSD rank is the least positive r admitting trace products of positive-semidefinite r×r factors.

Formalization target

Prove that every positive real power is eventually exceeded:

∀C>0  ∃n0≥4  ∀ even n≥n0,nC<psdRank⁡(n).\forall C>0\;\exists n_0\ge4\;\forall\text{ even }n\ge n_0,\qquad n^C<\operatorname{psdRank}(n).∀C>0∃n0​≥4∀ even n≥n0​,nC<psdRank(n).

The separate lift target gives the same superpolynomial lower bound for every exact affine PSD lift.

The selected formal target is OAI.PerfectMatchingPSD.main.

Significance and status

The selected formal goal excludes polynomial-size factorizations. The manuscript dated October 5 states exponential bounds for positively shifted matching matrices; that stronger shifted statement is not the existing published target. The published target is currently Open; the manuscript's argument and a checked Lean proof are separate deliverables.

Difficulty

Factors are unrestricted real PSD matrices, with no rank-one or symmetry requirement. Lower bounds for nonnegative rank alone do not rule them out.

Formalization scope

The target concerns the full unshifted row set and uses real exponentiation with C fixed before n₀. The affine-lift companion quantifies over affine sections and affine images of PSD cones. Independent definition groups are retained separately. The description deliberately makes no exponential or positive-shift claim for these references.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Exponential PSD rank of positively shifted matching matrices, preprint, 2026. Pinned manuscript.
  • OpenAI, accompanying formal statements, commit adc7f1241b42. Goal source.
4 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraNumerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Low-rank Matrix Recovery via Iteratively Reweighted Least Squares Minimization 2: A Rank Restricted Isometry Constant δ_4k < √2 − 1 Implies the Strong Rank Null Space Property of Order kResearch Paper

Motivation

Many estimation problems ask for a low-rank matrix from far fewer linear measurements than it has entries: matrix completion, quantum state tomography, recovery of positions from partial distances. The rank minimization problem min⁡rank⁡(X)\min \operatorname{rank}(X)minrank(X) subject to S(X)=M\mathcal S(X) = \mathcal MS(X)=M is NP-hard, so one solves a tractable surrogate instead, either the nuclear-norm minimization min⁡∥X∥∗\min \|X\|_*min∥X∥∗​ subject to S(X)=M\mathcal S(X) = \mathcal MS(X)=M or an iterative scheme such as the iteratively reweighted least squares algorithm IRLS-M of Fornasier, Rauhut and Ward (arXiv:1010.2471).

Guarantees for these surrogates rest on conditions on the measurement map. Two are standard. The restricted isometry property (RIP) asks that S\mathcal SS nearly preserve the Frobenius norm of every low-rank matrix; it holds with high probability for many random maps, and it is what one can verify in practice. The null space property asks that no nonzero matrix in the kernel of S\mathcal SS be concentrated on few singular directions; it is what the recovery proofs actually use. This mission formalizes the bridge between them in the paper's form: a small restricted isometry constant implies the strong rank null space property (SRNSP) that drives the convergence analysis of IRLS-M.

Timeline.

  • 2005: Candès and Tao introduce restricted isometry constants for sparse vectors and prove exact recovery by ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ minimization under a condition on them (IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory).
  • 2008: Candès shows that δ2s<2−1\delta_{2s} < \sqrt 2 - 1δ2s​<2​−1 suffices in the vector case (C. R. Math.).
  • 2010: Recht, Fazel and Parrilo define the rank restricted isometry property and prove that nuclear-norm minimization recovers every rank-rrr matrix when δ5r\delta_{5r}δ5r​ is small enough (SIAM Review).
  • 2011: Candès and Plan prove the matrix analogue of the 2−1\sqrt 2 - 12​−1 threshold and the orthogonality estimate quoted here as Lemma 6.9 (IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory).
  • 2011: Fornasier, Rauhut and Ward prove Proposition 6.8, the target of this mission: δ4k<2−1\delta_{4k} < \sqrt 2 - 1δ4k​<2​−1 implies the SRNSP of order kkk.

Setting

Fix integers n,p,mn, p, mn,p,m. A measurement map is a linear map S:Rn×p→Rm\mathcal S : \mathbb R^{n\times p} \to \mathbb R^mS:Rn×p→Rm; it is given by mmm matrices A1,…,AmA_1,\dots,A_mA1​,…,Am​ through S(X)ℓ=⟨Aℓ,X⟩\mathcal S(X)_\ell = \langle A_\ell, X\rangleS(X)ℓ​=⟨Aℓ​,X⟩, where ⟨X,Y⟩=Tr⁡(XY⊤)=∑i,jXijYij\langle X, Y\rangle = \operatorname{Tr}(XY^{\top}) = \sum_{i,j} X_{ij}Y_{ij}⟨X,Y⟩=Tr(XY⊤)=∑i,j​Xij​Yij​. The Frobenius norm is ∥X∥F=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|_F = \langle X, X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥F​=⟨X,X⟩1/2, the nuclear norm ∥X∥∗\|X\|_*∥X∥∗​ is the sum of the singular values of XXX, and ∥S(X)∥ℓ2m\|\mathcal S(X)\|_{\ell_2^m}∥S(X)∥ℓ2m​​ is the Euclidean norm of the vector S(X)\mathcal S(X)S(X). A matrix is kkk-rank if its rank is at most kkk.

The restricted isometry constant δk=δk(S)\delta_k = \delta_k(\mathcal S)δk​=δk​(S) (Definition 1.1) is the smallest δ≥0\delta \ge 0δ≥0 such that

(1−δ)∥X∥F2≤∥S(X)∥ℓ2m2≤(1+δ)∥X∥F2for all k-rank X.(1 - \delta)\|X\|_F^2 \le \|\mathcal S(X)\|_{\ell_2^m}^2 \le (1+\delta)\|X\|_F^2 \qquad \text{for all $k$-rank } X .(1−δ)∥X∥F2​≤∥S(X)∥ℓ2m​2​≤(1+δ)∥X∥F2​for all k-rank X.

The map S\mathcal SS has the strong rank null space property of order kkk with constant η∈(0,1)\eta \in (0,1)η∈(0,1) (Definition 6.4) if for every X∈ker⁡S∖{0}X \in \ker \mathcal S \setminus\{0\}X∈kerS∖{0} and every decomposition X=X1+X2X = X_1 + X_2X=X1​+X2​ with X1X_1X1​ kkk-rank, there is another decomposition X=H1+H2X = H_1 + H_2X=H1​+H2​ with rank⁡H1≤2k\operatorname{rank} H_1 \le 2krankH1​≤2k, ⟨H1,H2⟩=0\langle H_1, H_2\rangle = 0⟨H1​,H2​⟩=0, X1H2⊤=0X_1H_2^{\top} = 0X1​H2⊤​=0, X1⊤H2=0X_1^{\top}H_2 = 0X1⊤​H2​=0, and

∥H1∥∗≤η ∥H2∥∗.\|H_1\|_* \le \eta\,\|H_2\|_* .∥H1​∥∗​≤η∥H2​∥∗​.

In Lean these are IRLSM.RIP.ripConst A k, IRLSM.RIP.SRNSP A k η and IRLSM.RIP.measSq A X =∥S(X)∥ℓ2m2= \|\mathcal S(X)\|^2_{\ell_2^m}=∥S(X)∥ℓ2m​2​, built on the published module HighDimStat_MatrixRank_Core (traceInner, frobeniusNorm, nuclearNorm, observationOp).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.8

If δ4k>0\delta_{4k} > 0δ4k​>0 and

δ4k<2−1,\delta_{4k} < \sqrt 2 - 1,δ4k​<2​−1,

then S\mathcal SS satisfies the SRNSP of order kkk with constant

η=2 δ4k1−δ3k∈(0,1).\eta = \sqrt 2\,\frac{\delta_{4k}}{1 - \delta_{3k}} \in (0,1).η=2​1−δ3k​δ4k​​∈(0,1).

The constant η\etaη is the paper's explicit one; the goal asserts the full property for every kernel element and every decomposition, including η∈(0,1)\eta \in (0,1)η∈(0,1).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 6.9 (Candès–Plan): for ⟨X,Y⟩=0\langle X, Y\rangle = 0⟨X,Y⟩=0 and rank⁡X+rank⁡Y≤k\operatorname{rank}X + \operatorname{rank}Y \le krankX+rankY≤k, ∣⟨S(X),S(Y)⟩∣≤δk∥X∥F∥Y∥F|\langle \mathcal S(X), \mathcal S(Y)\rangle| \le \delta_k \|X\|_F\|Y\|_F∣⟨S(X),S(Y)⟩∣≤δk​∥X∥F​∥Y∥F​.
  2. Lemma 6.10 (Recht–Fazel–Parrilo): XZ⊤=0XZ^{\top} = 0XZ⊤=0 and X⊤Z=0X^{\top}Z = 0X⊤Z=0 imply ∥X+Z∥∗=∥X∥∗+∥Z∥∗\|X + Z\|_* = \|X\|_* + \|Z\|_*∥X+Z∥∗​=∥X∥∗​+∥Z∥∗​.
  3. The block decomposition of the proof: relative to an SVD X1=U(Σ000)V⊤X_1 = U(\begin{smallmatrix}\Sigma & 0\\ 0 & 0\end{smallmatrix})V^{\top}X1​=U(Σ0​00​)V⊤, the matrices H0H_0H0​ and HcH_cHc​ obtained by zeroing blocks of U⊤XVU^{\top}XVU⊤XV satisfy X=H0+HcX = H_0 + H_cX=H0​+Hc​, rank⁡H0≤2k\operatorname{rank}H_0 \le 2krankH0​≤2k, X1Hc⊤=0X_1H_c^{\top} = 0X1​Hc⊤​=0, X1⊤Hc=0X_1^{\top}H_c = 0X1⊤​Hc​=0, ⟨H0,Hc⟩=0\langle H_0, H_c\rangle = 0⟨H0​,Hc​⟩=0.
  4. ∥H∥∗≤r ∥H∥F\|H\|_* \le \sqrt r\,\|H\|_F∥H∥∗​≤r​∥H∥F​ for rank⁡H≤r\operatorname{rank}H \le rrankH≤r, and ∥H∥F≤∥H+K∥F\|H\|_F \le \|H + K\|_F∥H∥F​≤∥H+K∥F​ for ⟨H,K⟩=0\langle H, K\rangle = 0⟨H,K⟩=0.
  5. The shelling bound: for a nonincreasing nonnegative sequence cut into blocks of length ℓ\ellℓ, each block's ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ norm is at most ℓ−1/2\ell^{-1/2}ℓ−1/2 times the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ norm of the previous block.
  6. Monotonicity δk≤δk′\delta_k \le \delta_{k'}δk​≤δk′​ for k≤k′k \le k'k≤k′, and η∈(0,1)\eta \in (0,1)η∈(0,1) under 0<δ4k<2−10 < \delta_{4k} < \sqrt2 - 10<δ4k​<2​−1.

Significance

The result. Proposition 6.8 is the step that turns a verifiable, probabilistically typical hypothesis (a small rank restricted isometry constant, which Gaussian and many other random maps satisfy once mmm is of order kmax⁡(n,p)k\max(n,p)kmax(n,p)) into the deterministic null-space hypothesis under which the paper proves that IRLS-M converges to the nuclear-norm minimizer and recovers every kkk-rank matrix exactly (Theorem 6.11, Proposition 2.1). Through Lemma 6.6 and Corollary 6.7 of the same paper, the SRNSP also gives stable recovery by nuclear-norm minimization, with error controlled by the best kkk-rank approximation error in the nuclear norm.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper; it has no machine-checked proof that we know of. A complete development supplies the rank restricted isometry constant as a usable object (its monotonicity, its polarization estimate Lemma 6.9), the nuclear norm's additivity on orthogonal pieces, its comparison with the Frobenius norm, and the block-splitting of the singular value decomposition. These tools are reusable across low-rank recovery. The sibling mission of this series, IRLS-M Converges to the Nuclear-Norm Minimizer Under the Strong Rank Null Space Property, takes the SRNSP as its hypothesis; together the two give Proposition 2.1 of the paper.

Difficulty

The obvious argument would bound ∥H1∥∗\|H_1\|_*∥H1​∥∗​ directly by the restricted isometry inequality, but that inequality controls only Frobenius norms of low-rank matrices, while the kernel element XXX has full rank in general and the property is stated in nuclear norms. The restricted isometry hypothesis therefore cannot be applied to XXX, or to H2H_2H2​, as a whole, and the constant η\etaη depends on how the high-rank part is handled. In Lean, the singular value decomposition of a rectangular matrix and the behaviour of singular values under block operations are the main missing infrastructure: Mathlib has the spectral theorem for Hermitian matrices but little on singular values of rectangular matrices.

Formalization scope

  • Real matrices Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ; the paper treats real and complex matrices indifferently. X∗X^*X∗ is X⊤X^{\top}X⊤ and ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ is traceInner.
  • Measurement map by matrices: S(X)ℓ=⟨Aℓ,X⟩\mathcal S(X)_\ell = \langle A_\ell, X\rangleS(X)ℓ​=⟨Aℓ​,X⟩ (observationOp); ∥S(X)∥ℓ2m2\|\mathcal S(X)\|^2_{\ell_2^m}∥S(X)∥ℓ2m​2​ is a sum of squares, not Mathlib's sup norm on Fin m → ℝ.
  • The squared RIP constant of Definition 1.1, defined as the infimum of the admissible δ≥0\delta \ge 0δ≥0 (attained, never a junk value), for every k∈Nk \in \mathbb Nk∈N; the page's range 1≤k≤n1 \le k \le n1≤k≤n is dropped because the goal uses δ4k\delta_{4k}δ4k​ with 4k4k4k possibly larger than nnn. The unsquared constant (1−δ)∥X∥F≤∥S(X)∥≤(1+δ)∥X∥F(1-\delta)\|X\|_F \le \|\mathcal S(X)\| \le (1+\delta)\|X\|_F(1−δ)∥X∥F​≤∥S(X)∥≤(1+δ)∥X∥F​ used by other formalizations is a different quantity and is not used.
  • Positivity δ4k>0\delta_{4k} > 0δ4k​>0 is a hypothesis of the goal: it is Definition 1.1's own "δk>0\delta_k > 0δk​>0", and without it η=0∉(0,1)\eta = 0 \notin (0,1)η=0∈/(0,1).
  • No n ≤ p assumption: the proof does not use it.
  • The block decomposition milestone states the page's explicit construction, with a general (not necessarily diagonal) top-left block, and without the unused hypothesis X∈ker⁡SX \in \ker\mathcal SX∈kerS.
  • The shelling bound is stated in its vector form for every block; the page writes "for j≥2j \ge 2j≥2" but display (6.7) uses it for every j≥1j \ge 1j≥1.

A formalization that proved only η<1\eta < 1η<1, or only the existence of some decomposition without the bound ∥H1∥∗≤η∥H2∥∗\|H_1\|_* \le \eta\|H_2\|_*∥H1​∥∗​≤η∥H2​∥∗​, or that defined δk\delta_kδk​ as any admissible constant rather than the smallest one, would not be this mission's goal.

Welcome contributions: singular value decomposition for rectangular real matrices in the Core encoding, singular values of block-diagonal and orthogonally-equivalent matrices, and proofs of the milestones in any order.

Selected references

  • M. Fornasier, H. Rauhut, R. Ward, Low-rank matrix recovery via iteratively reweighted least squares minimization, SIAM J. Optim. 21(4), 2011; read as arXiv:1010.2471v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1010.2471
  • E. J. Candès, Y. Plan, Tight oracle inequalities for low-rank matrix recovery from a minimal number of noisy random measurements, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 57(4), 2011. https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.2011.2111771
  • B. Recht, M. Fazel, P. A. Parrilo, Guaranteed minimum-rank solutions of linear matrix equations via nuclear norm minimization, SIAM Review 52(3), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1137/070697835
  • E. J. Candès, T. Tao, Decoding by linear programming, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 51(12), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.2005.858979
  • E. J. Candès, The restricted isometry property and its implications for compressed sensing, C. R. Math. Acad. Sci. Paris 346, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.crma.2008.03.014
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraNumerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Low-rank Matrix Recovery via Iteratively Reweighted Least Squares Minimization 1: IRLS-M Converges to the Nuclear-Norm Minimizer Under the Strong Rank Null Space PropertyResearch Paper

Motivation

Many data problems ask for a matrix of low rank from far fewer linear measurements than it has entries: matrix completion (recommender systems, where a few ratings of a large user–item table are observed), system identification, and quantum state tomography. Minimizing the rank under the measurement constraints is NP-hard in general. The standard convex surrogate replaces the rank by the nuclear norm, the sum of the singular values, and recovers the low-rank matrix exactly when the measurement map is well conditioned on low-rank matrices (Recht, Fazel, Parrilo 2010; Candès, Recht 2009).

Solving the nuclear norm problem at scale is itself a numerical challenge: interior point methods do not scale, and first-order methods such as singular value thresholding (Cai, Candès, Shen 2010) need many iterations. Fornasier, Rauhut and Ward proposed an alternative, iteratively reweighted least squares for matrices (IRLS-M), which replaces the nonsmooth problem by a sequence of weighted least squares problems whose weights are recomputed from the current iterate. It is the matrix analogue of the IRLS method for sparse vectors of Daubechies, DeVore, Fornasier, Güntürk 2010, and a closely related algorithm was studied at the same time by Mohan and Fazel (Allerton 2010; journal version JMLR 2012).

Timeline. 2008–2010: nuclear norm recovery under rank restricted isometry (Recht–Fazel–Parrilo) and the rank null space property (Recht–Xu–Hassibi). 2010: convergence of IRLS for ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ under the vector null space property (Daubechies et al.). 2010–2011: IRLS-M and its convergence under the strong rank null space property (this paper, arXiv:1010.2471, SIAM J. Optim. 21(4), 2011).

Setting

Throughout, XXX is a real n×pn\times pn×p matrix with n≤pn\le pn≤p, with singular values σ1(X)≥⋯≥σn(X)≥0\sigma_1(X)\ge\dots\ge\sigma_n(X)\ge0σ1​(X)≥⋯≥σn​(X)≥0. The Frobenius norm is ∥X∥F\|X\|_F∥X∥F​, the nuclear norm is ∥X∥∗=∑iσi(X)\|X\|_*=\sum_i\sigma_i(X)∥X∥∗​=∑i​σi​(X), and ⟨X,Y⟩=∑i,jXijYij\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_{i,j}X_{ij}Y_{ij}⟨X,Y⟩=∑i,j​Xij​Yij​. A linear measurement map S:Rn×p→Rm\mathcal S:\mathbb R^{n\times p}\to\mathbb R^mS:Rn×p→Rm is given by matrices A1,…,AmA_1,\dots,A_mA1​,…,Am​ through S(X)l=⟨Al,X⟩\mathcal S(X)_l=\langle A_l,X\rangleS(X)l​=⟨Al​,X⟩; the data are M∈Rm\mathscr M\in\mathbb R^mM∈Rm.

The best kkk-rank approximation error is ρk(X)∗=min⁡rank⁡Z≤k∥X−Z∥∗\rho_k(X)_*=\min_{\operatorname{rank}Z\le k}\|X-Z\|_*ρk​(X)∗​=minrankZ≤k​∥X−Z∥∗​. The map S\mathcal SS has the strong rank null space property (SRNSP) of order kkk with constant η∈(0,1)\eta\in(0,1)η∈(0,1) if every nonzero X∈ker⁡SX\in\ker\mathcal SX∈kerS and every split X=X1+X2X=X_1+X_2X=X1​+X2​ with rank⁡X1≤k\operatorname{rank}X_1\le krankX1​≤k admit another split X=H1+H2X=H_1+H_2X=H1​+H2​ with rank⁡H1≤2k\operatorname{rank}H_1\le2krankH1​≤2k, ⟨H1,H2⟩=0\langle H_1,H_2\rangle=0⟨H1​,H2​⟩=0, X1H2T=0X_1H_2^{\mathsf T}=0X1​H2T​=0, X1TH2=0X_1^{\mathsf T}H_2=0X1T​H2​=0 and ∥H1∥∗≤η∥H2∥∗\|H_1\|_*\le\eta\|H_2\|_*∥H1​∥∗​≤η∥H2​∥∗​.

For ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 the weight of XXX is W=UΣε−1UTW=U\Sigma_\varepsilon^{-1}U^{\mathsf T}W=UΣε−1​UT, where XXT=UΣ2UTXX^{\mathsf T}=U\Sigma^2U^{\mathsf T}XXT=UΣ2UT and Σε=diag⁡(max⁡{σj,ε})\Sigma_\varepsilon=\operatorname{diag}(\max\{\sigma_j,\varepsilon\})Σε​=diag(max{σj​,ε}). The IRLS-M algorithm with parameters K∈NK\in\mathbb NK∈N and γ>0\gamma>0γ>0 starts from W0=IW^0=IW0=I, ε0=1\varepsilon_0=1ε0​=1 and repeats

Xℓ∈arg⁡min⁡S(X)=M∥(Wℓ−1)1/2X∥F2,εℓ=min⁡{εℓ−1,γσK+1(Xℓ)},X^\ell\in\arg\min_{\mathcal S(X)=\mathscr M}\|(W^{\ell-1})^{1/2}X\|_F^2,\qquad\varepsilon_\ell=\min\{\varepsilon_{\ell-1},\gamma\sigma_{K+1}(X^\ell)\},Xℓ∈argS(X)=Mmin​∥(Wℓ−1)1/2X∥F2​,εℓ​=min{εℓ−1​,γσK+1​(Xℓ)},

with WℓW^\ellWℓ the weight of XℓX^\ellXℓ at level εℓ\varepsilon_\ellεℓ​; it stops when εℓ=0\varepsilon_\ell=0εℓ​=0. Two functionals organize the analysis: J(X,W)=12(∥W1/2X∥F2+∥W−1/2∥F2)\mathcal J(X,W)=\tfrac12(\|W^{1/2}X\|_F^2+\|W^{-1/2}\|_F^2)J(X,W)=21​(∥W1/2X∥F2​+∥W−1/2∥F2​), of which IRLS-M is an alternating minimization, and Jε(X)=∑i=1njε(σi(X))\mathcal J_\varepsilon(X)=\sum_{i=1}^n j^\varepsilon(\sigma_i(X))Jε​(X)=∑i=1n​jε(σi​(X)) with jε(u)=∣u∣j^\varepsilon(u)=|u|jε(u)=∣u∣ for ∣u∣≥ε|u|\ge\varepsilon∣u∣≥ε and (u2+ε2)/(2ε)(u^2+\varepsilon^2)/(2\varepsilon)(u2+ε2)/(2ε) otherwise.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.11

For γ=1/n\gamma=1/nγ=1/n, any KKK, a surjective S\mathcal SS and any run (Xℓ,εℓ)(X^\ell,\varepsilon_\ell)(Xℓ,εℓ​):

(i)S SRNSP of order K, εℓ→0 ⟹ Xℓ→Xˉ, rank⁡Xˉ≤K, Xˉ=the unique nuclear norm minimizer.\text{(i)}\quad \mathcal S\ \text{SRNSP of order }K,\ \varepsilon_\ell\to0\ \Longrightarrow\ X^\ell\to\bar X,\ \operatorname{rank}\bar X\le K,\ \bar X=\text{the unique nuclear norm minimizer.}(i)S SRNSP of order K, εℓ​→0 ⟹ Xℓ→Xˉ, rankXˉ≤K, Xˉ=the unique nuclear norm minimizer.

(ii) If εℓ→ε>0\varepsilon_\ell\to\varepsilon>0εℓ​→ε>0, the iterates are relatively compact, their accumulation points minimize Jε\mathcal J_\varepsilonJε​ on the feasible set, and the sequence converges when that minimizer is unique; under the SRNSP with η<1−2/(K−2)\eta<1-2/(K-2)η<1−2/(K−2), every accumulation point Xˉ\bar XXˉ satisfies, for every feasible XXX and k<K−2η/(1−η)k<K-2\eta/(1-\eta)k<K−2η/(1−η),

∥X−Xˉ∥∗≤Λρk(X)∗,Λ=4(1+η)2(1−η)2((K−k)(1−η)−2η)+2(1+η)1−η.\|X-\bar X\|_*\le\Lambda\rho_k(X)_*,\qquad\Lambda=\frac{4(1+\eta)^2}{(1-\eta)^2((K-k)(1-\eta)-2\eta)}+\frac{2(1+\eta)}{1-\eta}.∥X−Xˉ∥∗​≤Λρk​(X)∗​,Λ=(1−η)2((K−k)(1−η)−2η)4(1+η)2​+1−η2(1+η)​.

(iii) Under the same SRNSP, if a feasible matrix of rank at most kkk exists, then εℓ→0\varepsilon_\ell\to0εℓ​→0.

Milestones

In attack order: the weighted least squares step (Lemma 5.1, the optimality condition (5.4)); the weight step (Lemma 5.2, Proposition 5.3); monotonicity of J\mathcal JJ along the run (Proposition 6.1); singular value facts (Weyl's Theorem 7.1, attainment of ρk\rho_kρk​ at the spectral truncation, Lemma 6.10, Proposition 7.2); null space theory (Theorem 6.3, the inverse triangle inequality Lemma 6.6 with (6.5), Corollary 6.7); and the two steps of the proof of (ii), the optimality condition (6.10) for Jε\mathcal J_\varepsilonJε​ and the bound (6.11).

Significance

Theorem 6.11 is the convergence guarantee of IRLS-M. Combined with the fact that a small rank restricted isometry constant implies the SRNSP (Proposition 6.8, the companion mission), it yields Proposition 2.1 of the paper: under δ4K<2−1\delta_{4K}<\sqrt2-1δ4K​<2​−1, IRLS-M recovers every rank-kkk matrix exactly and approximately low-rank matrices stably. Part (iii) says that the algorithm detects exact low-rank data on its own: the smoothing parameter must vanish.

The result is proved on paper; no machine-checked proof exists. A complete formalization would give a machine-checked convergence proof of an IRLS-type method; none is on the platform, for vectors or matrices. It also produces reusable matrix analysis: Weyl's perturbation bound for singular values, the nuclear norm best rank-kkk approximation (a Mirsky-type theorem), additivity of the nuclear norm under orthogonality, the null space characterization of nuclear norm recovery, and optimality conditions for spectral functions.

Difficulty

Two steps resist the obvious argument. First, the weight update is a constrained minimization over the positive definite cone; identifying its solution (Proposition 5.3) requires a duality or spectral argument rather than setting a gradient to zero, because the constraint W⪯ε−1IW\preceq\varepsilon^{-1}IW⪯ε−1I is active on small singular values. Second, in case (ii) the limit functional Jε\mathcal J_\varepsilonJε​ is convex but not strictly convex, so accumulation points cannot be pinned down by uniqueness; the analysis must instead pass the optimality condition (5.4) of the iterates to the limit, using continuity of the weights in the iterate, and derive (6.10). The step relating ∇Jε\nabla\mathcal J_\varepsilon∇Jε​ to WXˉW\bar XWXˉ needs the differentiability of unitarily invariant spectral functions, which the paper imports from Lewis and Sendov. Weyl's inequality and the spectral truncation facts, routine on paper, are not yet in Mathlib for rectangular matrices.

Formalization scope

All matrices are real (Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ); the paper treats real and complex matrices alike. The paper's standing assumption n≤pn\le pn≤p is a hypothesis wherever n×nn\times nn×n objects (XXTXX^{\mathsf T}XXT, WWW, γ=1/n\gamma=1/nγ=1/n, Jε\mathcal J_\varepsilonJε​) occur. Nuclear norm, Frobenius norm, trace inner product and singular values come from the published definition HighDimStat_MatrixRank_Core; sv X i is σi+1(X)\sigma_{i+1}(X)σi+1​(X), 0-based. The measurement map is given by measurement matrices (observationOp), which represents every linear map to Rm\mathbb R^mRm. The weight is defined with Mathlib's continuous functional calculus, and W1/2W^{1/2}W1/2 is cfc Real.sqrt W. The algorithm is the relation IsRun: each Xℓ+1X^{\ell+1}Xℓ+1 is some minimizer of (2.9), X0X^0X0 is free, and εj=0\varepsilon_j=0εj​=0 after a stop. Accumulation points are MapClusterPt; uniqueness of a nuclear norm minimizer is a strict inequality against every other feasible matrix.

The goal cannot be satisfied vacuously: IsRun has a run for every surjective S\mathcal SS and every M\mathscr MM (Lemma 5.1 supplies the minimizers), it carries no positivity or uniqueness assumption a real run could violate, and the theorem keeps all three parts, including the unique-minimizer clause of (i) and the error bound of (ii) for every feasible XXX and every admissible kkk.

Two printed slips are corrected and disclosed: (5.5) omits the factor 12\tfrac1221​ of (5.1), and (6.5) reverses the bracket of (6.4) at ρk=0\rho_k=0ρk​=0. Contributions welcome: Weyl's inequality and the Mirsky-type truncation theorem for rectangular matrices, the spectral calculus behind Propositions 5.3 and (6.10), and proofs of the null space results, which are independent of the algorithm.

Selected references

  • M. Fornasier, H. Rauhut, R. Ward, Low-rank matrix recovery via iteratively reweighted least squares minimization, SIAM J. Optim. 21(4), 2011. https://arxiv.org/abs/1010.2471 (v4 is the version formalized)
  • B. Recht, M. Fazel, P. A. Parrilo, Guaranteed minimum-rank solutions of linear matrix equations via nuclear norm minimization, SIAM Review 52(3), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1137/070697835
  • B. Recht, W. Xu, B. Hassibi, Null space conditions and thresholds for rank minimization, Math. Program. 127, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-010-0422-2
  • I. Daubechies, R. DeVore, M. Fornasier, C. S. Güntürk, Iteratively reweighted least squares minimization for sparse recovery, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 63(1), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.20303
  • K. Mohan, M. Fazel, Iterative reweighted least squares for matrix rank minimization, Proc. Allerton Conference, 2010; journal version Iterative reweighted algorithms for matrix rank minimization, JMLR 13, 2012. https://jmlr.org/papers/v13/mohan12a.html
  • E. J. Candès, B. Recht, Exact matrix completion via convex optimization, Found. Comput. Math. 9, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-009-9045-5
  • J.-F. Cai, E. J. Candès, Z. Shen, A singular value thresholding algorithm for matrix completion, SIAM J. Optim. 20(4), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1137/080738970
  • A. S. Lewis, H. S. Sendov, Nonsmooth analysis of singular values. I: Theory, Set-Valued Analysis 13(3), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11228-004-7197-7
18 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Prox-Method with Rate of Convergence O(1/t) for Variational Inequalities with Lipschitz Continuous Monotone Operators and Smooth Convex-Concave Saddle Point Problems: Error √2ΘL/(αN) After N StepsResearch Paper

Motivation

Monotone variational inequalities (v.i.) cover convex minimization, convex–concave saddle-point problems, Nash equilibria of convex games and complementarity problems. Matrix games and other large saddle-point problems are typical cases. At large scale, first-order methods that use only values of the operator and simple auxiliary minimizations are the practical tool. The paper's introduction (pp. 229–231) contrasts this with the black-box lower bound of order 1/ϵ21/\epsilon^21/ϵ2 evaluations for nonsmooth Lipschitz minimization, and with Nesterov's smoothing method (2005), which reaches O(1/t)O(1/t)O(1/t) for structured saddle-point objectives. The paper states that its O(1/t)O(1/t)O(1/t) complexity estimate is new, to the author's knowledge, even in the Euclidean case, where the scheme is Korpelevich's extragradient method of 1976.

A. Nemirovski, Prox-Method with Rate of Convergence O(1/t) for Variational Inequalities with Lipschitz Continuous Monotone Operators and Smooth Convex-Concave Saddle Point Problems, SIAM J. Optim. 15(1):229–251, 2004 (doi:10.1137/S1052623403425629), introduced what is now called the mirror-prox method. It showed that two prox steps per iteration give an ergodic error of order 1/N1/N1/N when the operator is Lipschitz continuous, and that the bound holds in an arbitrary norm, adapted to the geometry of the feasible set by a distance-generating function. The method and its analysis underlie later work on smooth saddle-point problems, including Nesterov's dual extrapolation and Juditsky–Nemirovski–Tauvel's stochastic mirror-prox (2011).

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, not necessarily Euclidean. Dual vectors ξ\xiξ act on z∈Ez\in Ez∈E by ⟨ξ,z⟩\langle\xi,z\rangle⟨ξ,z⟩, and the conjugate norm is ∥ξ∥∗=max⁡∥z∥≤1⟨ξ,z⟩\|\xi\|_*=\max_{\|z\|\le1}\langle\xi,z\rangle∥ξ∥∗​=max∥z∥≤1​⟨ξ,z⟩. Let Z⊆EZ\subseteq EZ⊆E be nonempty, convex and compact.

The operator FFF maps ZZZ to dual vectors and satisfies (2.1): it is LLL-Lipschitz, ∥F(z)−F(z′)∥∗≤L∥z−z′∥\|F(z)-F(z')\|_*\le L\|z-z'\|∥F(z)−F(z′)∥∗​≤L∥z−z′∥, and monotone, ⟨F(z)−F(z′),z−z′⟩≥0\langle F(z)-F(z'),z-z'\rangle\ge0⟨F(z)−F(z′),z−z′⟩≥0, for all z,z′∈Zz,z'\in Zz,z′∈Z. A solution of the v.i. is a point z∗∈Zz_*\in Zz∗​∈Z with ⟨F(z),z∗−z⟩≤0\langle F(z),z_*-z\rangle\le0⟨F(z),z∗​−z⟩≤0 for all z∈Zz\in Zz∈Z. The accuracy of a candidate zˉ∈Z\bar z\in Zzˉ∈Z is

ϵ(zˉ)=max⁡u∈Z⟨F(u),zˉ−u⟩.\epsilon(\bar z)=\max_{u\in Z}\langle F(u),\bar z-u\rangle .ϵ(zˉ)=u∈Zmax​⟨F(u),zˉ−u⟩.

The distance-generating function ω:Z→R\omega:Z\to\mathbb Rω:Z→R is continuously differentiable on ZZZ and strongly convex with modulus α>0\alpha>0α>0 in the form (2.2): ⟨ω′(z)−ω′(w),z−w⟩≥α∥z−w∥2\langle\omega'(z)-\omega'(w),z-w\rangle\ge\alpha\|z-w\|^2⟨ω′(z)−ω′(w),z−w⟩≥α∥z−w∥2. The prox-mapping is

Pz(ξ)=argmin⁡w∈Z[ω(w)+⟨ξ−ω′(z),w⟩],P_z(\xi)=\operatorname*{argmin}_{w\in Z}\big[\omega(w)+\langle\xi-\omega'(z),w\rangle\big],Pz​(ξ)=w∈Zargmin​[ω(w)+⟨ξ−ω′(z),w⟩],

and the constant Θ(z0)=max⁡z∈Z[ω(z)−ω(z0)−⟨ω′(z0),z−z0⟩]\Theta(z_0)=\max_{z\in Z}[\omega(z)-\omega(z_0)-\langle\omega'(z_0),z-z_0\rangle]Θ(z0​)=maxz∈Z​[ω(z)−ω(z0​)−⟨ω′(z0​),z−z0​⟩] measures how far ZZZ extends from the starting point z0z_0z0​ in the geometry of ω\omegaω.

The basic implementation fixes the stepsize γ=α/(2L)\gamma=\alpha/(\sqrt2L)γ=α/(2​L) (3.2). At step ttt it computes wt,1=Pzt−1(γF(zt−1))w_{t,1}=P_{z_{t-1}}(\gamma F(z_{t-1}))wt,1​=Pzt−1​​(γF(zt−1​)) and checks the test (3.4),

⟨γF(a),a−b⟩+ω(zt−1)+⟨ω′(zt−1),b−zt−1⟩−ω(b)≤0,\langle\gamma F(a),a-b\rangle+\omega(z_{t-1})+\langle\omega'(z_{t-1}),b-z_{t-1}\rangle-\omega(b)\le0,⟨γF(a),a−b⟩+ω(zt−1​)+⟨ω′(zt−1​),b−zt−1​⟩−ω(b)≤0,

for (a,b)=(zt−1,wt,1)(a,b)=(z_{t-1},w_{t,1})(a,b)=(zt−1​,wt,1​). If the test passes, wt=zt−1w_t=z_{t-1}wt​=zt−1​ and zt=wt,1z_t=w_{t,1}zt​=wt,1​. Otherwise wt=wt,1w_t=w_{t,1}wt​=wt,1​ and zt=Pzt−1(γF(wt,1))z_t=P_{z_{t-1}}(\gamma F(w_{t,1}))zt​=Pzt−1​​(γF(wt,1​)). The output after NNN steps is the average zN=1N∑t=1Nwtz^N=\frac1N\sum_{t=1}^Nw_tzN=N1​∑t=1N​wt​ of the points wtw_twt​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 239), variational-inequality form

For every run of the basic implementation, (3.4) holds at every step, so two inner iterations always suffice, and for every N≥1N\ge1N≥1

ϵ(zN)≤2 Θ(z0) LαN.(3.9)\epsilon(z^N)\le\frac{\sqrt2\,\Theta(z_0)\,L}{\alpha N}.\tag{3.9}ϵ(zN)≤αN2​Θ(z0​)L​.(3.9)

Milestones, in the order of the proof

  1. Lemma 2.1 (2.5), p. 232: Hu(Pz(ξ))−Hu(z)≤⟨ξ,u−Pz(ξ)⟩+[ω(z)+⟨ω′(z),Pz(ξ)−z⟩−ω(Pz(ξ))]H_u(P_z(\xi))-H_u(z)\le\langle\xi,u-P_z(\xi)\rangle+[\omega(z)+\langle\omega'(z),P_z(\xi)-z\rangle-\omega(P_z(\xi))]Hu​(Pz​(ξ))−Hu​(z)≤⟨ξ,u−Pz​(ξ)⟩+[ω(z)+⟨ω′(z),Pz​(ξ)−z⟩−ω(Pz​(ξ))], and the bracket is ≤0\le0≤0. Here Hu(z)=Ω(ω′(z))−⟨ω′(z),u⟩H_u(z)=\Omega(\omega'(z))-\langle\omega'(z),u\rangleHu​(z)=Ω(ω′(z))−⟨ω′(z),u⟩ and Ω\OmegaΩ is the Legendre transform of ω∣Z\omega|_Zω∣Z​.
  2. (2.15), p. 235: one step of the relaxed conceptual prox-method satisfies ⟨γtF(wt),wt−u⟩≤Hu(zt−1)−Hu(zt)+ϵt\langle\gamma_tF(w_t),w_t-u\rangle\le H_u(z_{t-1})-H_u(z_t)+\epsilon_t⟨γt​F(wt​),wt​−u⟩≤Hu​(zt−1​)−Hu​(zt​)+ϵt​.
  3. Proposition 2.2(ii), p. 234: ϵ(zN)≤(Θ(z0)+∑tϵt)/∑tγt\epsilon(z^N)\le(\Theta(z_0)+\sum_t\epsilon_t)/\sum_t\gamma_tϵ(zN)≤(Θ(z0​)+∑t​ϵt​)/∑t​γt​ for the relaxed method (2.11).
  4. Lemma 3.1 (3.7.a), p. 238: ∥w−z+∥≤α−1γ∥ξ−η∥∗\|w-z_+\|\le\alpha^{-1}\gamma\|\xi-\eta\|_*∥w−z+​∥≤α−1γ∥ξ−η∥∗​.
  5. Lemma 3.1 (3.7.c), p. 238: δ≤ϵ\delta\le\epsilonδ≤ϵ.
  6. Lemma 3.1 (3.7.d), p. 238: ϵ≤α−1γ2∥ξ−η∥∗2−α2[∥w−z∥2+∥w−z+∥2]\epsilon\le\alpha^{-1}\gamma^2\|\xi-\eta\|_*^2-\frac\alpha2[\|w-z\|^2+\|w-z_+\|^2]ϵ≤α−1γ2∥ξ−η∥∗2​−2α​[∥w−z∥2+∥w−z+​∥2].
  7. The display of the proof of Theorem 3.2, p. 239: with γ=α/(2L)\gamma=\alpha/(\sqrt2L)γ=α/(2​L), the second inner iterate always passes (3.4).

Lemma 2.1 (2.4), Lemma 3.1 (3.7.b) and Remark 2.3 are also stated as companion theorems.

Significance

The theorem gives an O(1/N)O(1/N)O(1/N) bound for monotone Lipschitz v.i. and for smooth convex–concave saddle points at a cost of two operator evaluations and two prox problems per step. With a distance-generating function adapted to ZZZ, the paper derives rates that are, in its words, nearly dimension-independent under favorable circumstances, for matrix games, eigenvalue minimization and the Lovász capacity number (§5). In the Euclidean case ω=12∥⋅∥22\omega=\frac12\|\cdot\|_2^2ω=21​∥⋅∥22​ the method is Korpelevich's extragradient method, so the theorem also gives an ergodic O(1/N)O(1/N)O(1/N) rate for that method.

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked proof of it is known. The platform has a formalized statement of mirror prox for minimization of a smooth convex function (Bubeck's Theorem 4.4), which uses a mirror map on an open set and a function-value gap. It does not cover operators, the v.i. accuracy measure or a prox-mapping over a compact set. This mission produces the general v.i. version, with an arbitrary norm and a distance-generating function defined only on ZZZ.

Difficulty

The algebra of each step is short. The work is in three places. First, the first-order optimality conditions of the constrained prox problems, (2.6) and (3.8), must be derived when ω′\omega'ω′ is only a derivative within ZZZ, and ZZZ may have empty interior. Second, (3.7.d) needs the function-value form of strong convexity, ω(w)≥ω(z)+⟨ω′(z),w−z⟩+α2∥w−z∥2\omega(w)\ge\omega(z)+\langle\omega'(z),w-z\rangle+\frac\alpha2\|w-z\|^2ω(w)≥ω(z)+⟨ω′(z),w−z⟩+2α​∥w−z∥2, which must be derived from the monotonicity form (2.2) along segments of ZZZ. Third, the telescoping of (2.15) uses the identity Ω(ω′(z))=⟨ω′(z),z⟩−ω(z)\Omega(\omega'(z))=\langle\omega'(z),z\rangle-\omega(z)Ω(ω′(z))=⟨ω′(z),z⟩−ω(z) for z∈Zz\in Zz∈Z, and the passage from the weighted sum to the average uses monotonicity of FFF.

The natural first idea is to prove that the inner map w↦Pz(γF(w))w\mapsto P_z(\gamma F(w))w↦Pz​(γF(w)) is a contraction, observation (3.1), and iterate it to a fixed point. That gives only a geometric number of inner steps, not two. The two-step bound comes from Lemma 3.1, which decouples the two prox steps and compares them through strong convexity.

Formalization scope

Dual vectors are continuous linear functionals E →L[ℝ] ℝ on a finite-dimensional normed space E, and ∥⋅∥∗\|\cdot\|_*∥⋅∥∗​ is the operator norm. This is equivalent to the paper's Euclidean space with a second norm. ZZZ is assumed convex, compact and nonempty in every item. ω\omegaω has a derivative within ZZZ that is continuous on ZZZ, and (2.2) is assumed in the monotonicity form. The prox-mapping is the relation "v∈Uv\in Uv∈U minimizes ω(y)+⟨ξ−ω′(z),y⟩\omega(y)+\langle\xi-\omega'(z),y\rangleω(y)+⟨ξ−ω′(z),y⟩ over UUU". Ω\OmegaΩ and Θ\ThetaΘ are suprema over the image of ZZZ, which are maxima under these assumptions. The paper's indices are kept: z 0 is z0z_0z0​, and step t+1t+1t+1 goes from z t to w (t+1) and z (t+1).

Disclosed choices: L>0L>0L>0 and N≥1N\ge1N≥1 are hypotheses, because (3.2) and (3.9) divide by them. The termination test (2.8) is not modelled, so runs never stop; this only adds runs. The basic implementation's inner loop is cut at s=2s=2s=2, which is what the goal's first claim justifies. The bound on ϵ(zN)\epsilon(z^N)ϵ(zN) is stated for every u∈Zu\in Zu∈Z, which is equivalent to the bound on the maximum. Items that use only monotonicity of FFF, or no property of FFF, do not assume the rest of (2.1).

The goal quantifies over every run, and a sorry-free sanity file exhibits a run on Z=[0,1]Z=[0,1]Z=[0,1], so the run relation is not empty. The average is over the wtw_twt​, not the ztz_tzt​. The suprema are taken over compact nonempty ZZZ with continuous ω\omegaω, so they are not junk values. The saddle-point form (3.10), the bound (2.14) and Theorems 4.1–4.2 are not posed.

Useful contributions: optimality conditions for minimizers of functions differentiable within a convex set; the function-value form of strong convexity derived from (2.2); and the Legendre-transform identity. All three are reusable for other mirror-descent and prox-method analyses.

Selected references

  • A. Nemirovski, Prox-Method with Rate of Convergence O(1/t) for Variational Inequalities with Lipschitz Continuous Monotone Operators and Smooth Convex-Concave Saddle Point Problems, SIAM J. Optim. 15(1):229–251, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623403425629
  • G. M. Korpelevich, The extragradient method for finding saddle points and other problems, Ekonomika i Matematicheskie Metody 12:747–756, 1976.
  • Yu. Nesterov, Dual extrapolation and its applications to solving variational inequalities and related problems, Math. Program. 109:319–344, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-006-0034-z
  • A. Juditsky, A. Nemirovski, C. Tauvel, Solving variational inequalities with stochastic mirror-prox algorithm, Stochastic Systems 1(1):17–58, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1214/10-SSY011
  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 8(3–4):231–357, 2015, §4.5. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000050
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Regression and Lasso 2: When an Absolute Norm Bounds the Column Disturbance Norms, Robust Regression Is Regression Regularized by the Dual Norm, ‖b − Ax‖ₐ + l‖x‖*ₛResearch Paper

Motivation

Robust regression guards a linear model against errors in the data matrix. The observations b∈Rnb \in \mathbb R^nb∈Rn are fitted by AxAxAx, but the features (the columns a1,…,ama_1,\dots,a_ma1​,…,am​ of AAA) are only known up to a disturbance ΔA\Delta AΔA from an uncertainty set U\mathcal UU. The robust estimator minimizes the worst-case residual,

min⁡x∈Rm max⁡ΔA∈U∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥.\min_{x \in \mathbb R^m}\ \max_{\Delta A \in \mathcal U} \|b - (A+\Delta A)x\| .x∈Rmmin​ ΔA∈Umax​∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥.

Xu, Caramanis and Mannor (arXiv:0811.1790v1; IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 56(7), 2010) showed that when each column is perturbed independently within a Euclidean ball of radius cic_ici​, this problem is exactly the weighted ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularized problem min⁡x∥b−Ax∥2+∑ici∣xi∣\min_x \|b - Ax\|_2 + \sum_i c_i|x_i|minx​∥b−Ax∥2​+∑i​ci​∣xi​∣, an un-squared Lasso (their Theorem 1, the subject of the first mission of this series). Robustness then explains regularization: the penalty is the price of the worst disturbance.

Section III of the paper asks which regularizers arise when the disturbances of different features are coupled, that is, when a single budget limits all columns jointly. The answer it gives is that every norm-based regularizer arises this way: a norm budget on the vector of column-disturbance sizes produces the dual norm as the penalty. This links robust optimization (Ben-Tal, El Ghaoui, Nemirovski 2009) and regularized estimation, and it recovers the robust least-squares formulation of El Ghaoui and Lebret (1997) as the Euclidean special case.

Setting

Fix n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, m≥0m \ge 0m≥0, and an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥a\|\cdot\|_a∥⋅∥a​ on Rn\mathbb R^nRn. The data are the columns a1,…,am∈Rna_1,\dots,a_m \in \mathbb R^na1​,…,am​∈Rn of AAA and the response b∈Rnb \in \mathbb R^nb∈Rn; for x∈Rmx \in \mathbb R^mx∈Rm, Ax=∑ixiaiAx = \sum_i x_i a_iAx=∑i​xi​ai​. A disturbance is ΔA=(δ1,…,δm)\Delta A = (\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m)ΔA=(δ1​,…,δm​) with δi∈Rn\delta_i \in \mathbb R^nδi​∈Rn; the perturbed matrix A+ΔAA + \Delta AA+ΔA has columns ai+δia_i + \delta_iai​+δi​. For an uncertainty set U\mathcal UU the robust objective is

RU(x)=sup⁡ΔA∈U∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a∈[−∞,+∞].R_{\mathcal U}(x) = \sup_{\Delta A\in\mathcal U} \|b - (A+\Delta A)x\|_a \in [-\infty,+\infty].RU​(x)=ΔA∈Usup​∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a​∈[−∞,+∞].

Three families of uncertainty sets appear.

  1. Feature-wise (Theorem 3): for budgets ci≥0c_i \ge 0ci​≥0, Ua={(δ1,…,δm):∥δi∥a≤ci}\mathcal U_a = \{(\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m) : \|\delta_i\|_a \le c_i\}Ua​={(δ1​,…,δm​):∥δi​∥a​≤ci​}.
  2. Coupled (p. 6): for functions f1,…,fk:Rm→Rf_1,\dots,f_k:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb Rf1​,…,fk​:Rm→R, U′={(δ1,…,δm):fj(∥δ1∥a,…,∥δm∥a)≤0, j=1,…,k}\mathcal U' = \{(\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m) : f_j(\|\delta_1\|_a,\dots,\|\delta_m\|_a) \le 0,\ j=1,\dots,k\}U′={(δ1​,…,δm​):fj​(∥δ1​∥a​,…,∥δm​∥a​)≤0, j=1,…,k}, with the budget set Z={z∈Rm:fj(z)≤0 ∀j, z≥0}\mathcal Z = \{z \in \mathbb R^m : f_j(z) \le 0\ \forall j,\ z \ge 0\}Z={z∈Rm:fj​(z)≤0 ∀j, z≥0}.
  3. Norm budget (Corollary 1): for a norm ∥⋅∥s\|\cdot\|_s∥⋅∥s​ on Rm\mathbb R^mRm and l≥0l \ge 0l≥0, U′={(δ1,…,δm):∥(∥δ1∥a,…,∥δm∥a)∥s≤l}\mathcal U' = \{(\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m) : \|(\|\delta_1\|_a,\dots,\|\delta_m\|_a)\|_s \le l\}U′={(δ1​,…,δm​):∥(∥δ1​∥a​,…,∥δm​∥a​)∥s​≤l}. The dual norm is ∥y∥s∗=sup⁡{y⊤z:∥z∥s≤1}\|y\|_s^* = \sup\{y^\top z : \|z\|_s \le 1\}∥y∥s∗​=sup{y⊤z:∥z∥s​≤1}. A norm is absolute if ∥(∣z1∣,…,∣zm∣)∥s=∥z∥s\|(|z_1|,\dots,|z_m|)\|_s = \|z\|_s∥(∣z1​∣,…,∣zm​∣)∥s​=∥z∥s​ for all zzz.

A fourth, polytope set, {(δ1,…,δm):∃c≥0, Tc≤s, ∥δj∥a≤cj}\{(\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m) : \exists c \ge 0,\ Tc \le s,\ \|\delta_j\|_a \le c_j\}{(δ1​,…,δm​):∃c≥0, Tc≤s, ∥δj​∥a​≤cj​} for T∈Rk×mT \in \mathbb R^{k\times m}T∈Rk×m, s∈Rks\in\mathbb R^ks∈Rk, is the subject of Corollary 2. Write ∣x∣=(∣x1∣,…,∣xm∣)|x| = (|x_1|,\dots,|x_m|)∣x∣=(∣x1​∣,…,∣xm​∣).

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 1 (p. 7)

For an absolute norm ∥⋅∥s\|\cdot\|_s∥⋅∥s​ and l≥0l \ge 0l≥0, for every x∈Rmx \in \mathbb R^mx∈Rm the worst case over the norm-budget set is attained and

max⁡ΔA∈U′∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a=∥b−Ax∥a+l ∥x∥s∗,\max_{\Delta A\in\mathcal U'} \|b-(A+\Delta A)x\|_a = \|b - Ax\|_a + l\,\|x\|_s^*,ΔA∈U′max​∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a​=∥b−Ax∥a​+l∥x∥s∗​,

and the robust problem and min⁡x∥b−Ax∥a+l∥x∥s∗\min_x \|b-Ax\|_a + l\|x\|_s^*minx​∥b−Ax∥a​+l∥x∥s∗​ have the same minimizers.

Milestone: Theorem 3 (p. 6)

For c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 and every xxx: max⁡ΔA∈Ua∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a=∥b−Ax∥a+∑ici∣xi∣\max_{\Delta A\in\mathcal U_a}\|b-(A+\Delta A)x\|_a = \|b-Ax\|_a + \sum_i c_i|x_i|maxΔA∈Ua​​∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a​=∥b−Ax∥a​+∑i​ci​∣xi​∣, attained, with the same minimizers.

Milestone: Eq. (13) (proof of Theorem 4, Appendix B, p. 19)

For every xxx, in the extended reals,

sup⁡ΔA∈U′∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a=∥b−Ax∥a+sup⁡c∈Z∣x∣⊤c.\sup_{\Delta A\in\mathcal U'} \|b-(A+\Delta A)x\|_a = \|b-Ax\|_a + \sup_{c\in\mathcal Z} |x|^\top c .ΔA∈U′sup​∥b−(A+ΔA)x∥a​=∥b−Ax∥a​+c∈Zsup​∣x∣⊤c.

Milestone: Corollary 2 (p. 7)

If some c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 has Tc≤sTc \le sTc≤s, then for every xxx the worst case over the polytope set equals ∥b−Ax∥a+inf⁡{s⊤λ:x≤T⊤λ, −x≤T⊤λ, λ≥0}\|b-Ax\|_a + \inf\{s^\top\lambda : x \le T^\top\lambda,\ -x\le T^\top\lambda,\ \lambda\ge0\}∥b−Ax∥a​+inf{s⊤λ:x≤T⊤λ, −x≤T⊤λ, λ≥0} (both sides +∞+\infty+∞ when the constraints are infeasible), the infimum is attained when feasible, and robust minimizers are exactly the xxx-parts of optimal solutions of that linear program.

The paper's general result, Theorem 4 (p. 6), expresses the coupled robust problem through a Lagrangian function v(λ,κ,x)v(\lambda,\kappa,x)v(λ,κ,x) under the assumption that Z\mathcal ZZ has nonempty relative interior. The mission does not pose it: that assumption is not Slater's condition, and the statement fails without one (an explicit counterexample with Z={0}×[0,∞)\mathcal Z = \{0\}\times[0,\infty)Z={0}×[0,∞) is recorded in the series plan). The mission poses the decomposition (13), on which Theorem 4 rests, and the two corollaries, which are true as stated under the readings below.

Significance

The result. Corollary 1 says that any norm penalty l∥x∥s∗l\|x\|_s^*l∥x∥s∗​ is the worst-case cost of column disturbances whose sizes are jointly bounded in the dual norm. Taking ∥⋅∥s=ℓ∞\|\cdot\|_s = \ell_\infty∥⋅∥s​=ℓ∞​ gives the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ penalty (budget per column), ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ gives ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ (a shared budget), and both Euclidean gives the Frobenius-ball model of robust least squares. Corollary 2 shows that polytope budgets keep the problem a linear program apart from the loss, which allows modeling, for instance, corruption of an unknown subset of features. Eq. (13) is the common reduction behind these: the coupled worst case is the uncoupled one maximized over the admissible budget vectors.

Formalizing it. None of these statements has a machine-checked proof. The mission makes precise two points the paper leaves implicit: which "symmetric" norms the corollary is true for, and in what sense "max" holds when the budget set is empty or unbounded. The finished development is a self-contained library of worst-case residual identities for arbitrary norms on finite-dimensional or general normed spaces. Related platform items, credited and not reused: SPOBounds.StronglyConvex.dual_norm_ball_max (maximum of a linear functional over a norm ball, with the continuous-dual norm), and RobustLS.Unstructured.worst_case_residual_closed_form (El Ghaoui–Lebret, which perturbs [A b][A\ b][A b] in a Frobenius ball, a different set).

Difficulty

The upper bound of every identity is a triangle inequality. The content is in the matching lower bound: a disturbance must be exhibited that aligns all perturbed columns with the residual direction, and in (13) each column disturbance must have norm exactly cic_ici​, including columns with xi=0x_i = 0xi​=0, which is where n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 enters. The paper's first line of the proof of (13) rewrites U′\mathcal U'U′ as {ΔA:∃c∈Z, ∥δi∥a≤ci}\{\Delta A : \exists c \in \mathcal Z,\ \|\delta_i\|_a \le c_i\}{ΔA:∃c∈Z, ∥δi​∥a​≤ci​}; that set identity is false unless Z\mathcal ZZ is downward closed, so the obvious route through it does not work for (13) as stated. For Corollary 1 the remaining step is the identity sup⁡{∣x∣⊤c:c≥0, ∥c∥s≤l}=l∥x∥s∗\sup\{|x|^\top c : c\ge0,\ \|c\|_s\le l\} = l\|x\|_s^*sup{∣x∣⊤c:c≥0, ∥c∥s​≤l}=l∥x∥s∗​, which needs the absolute property and fails for norms that are only permutation invariant. For Corollary 2 the remaining step is linear programming duality, which Mathlib does not yet provide in this form.

Formalization scope

(Rn,∥⋅∥a)(\mathbb R^n, \|\cdot\|_a)(Rn,∥⋅∥a​) is an arbitrary real normed space EEE with Nontrivial E (the paper's implicit n≥1n\ge1n≥1); finite dimension is not imposed, a harmless generalization. Columns are a family a : Fin m → E, disturbances δ : Fin m → E, coefficients Fin m → ℝ, and Ax=∑ixi⋅aiAx = \sum_i x_i \cdot a_iAx=∑i​xi​⋅ai​. Explicit readings:

  1. The robust objective is a supremum over the uncertainty set, computed in EReal; it is never defined by its closed form. "Max" is stated as IsGreatest of the set of residual values (attained) in Theorem 3 and Corollary 1, where the maximum exists, and as an EReal supremum in (13) and Corollary 2, where it need not.
  2. "Is equivalent to" / "the resulting regularized regression problem is" means: equal objectives at every xxx and equal sets of minimizers. Existence of a minimizer is not claimed.
  3. "Symmetric norm" is read as absolute; ∥⋅∥s\|\cdot\|_s∥⋅∥s​ is a Mathlib Seminorm on Fin m → ℝ with Nz=0⇒z=0N z = 0 \Rightarrow z = 0Nz=0⇒z=0 (the type already carries the sup norm, so the notation ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is not used for it). The dual norm is a real sSup of {y⊤z:Nz≤1}\{y^\top z : N z \le 1\}{y⊤z:Nz≤1}, a nonempty set that is bounded above because NNN is a norm on Rm\mathbb R^mRm.
  4. l≥0l \ge 0l≥0 is added to Corollary 1, and feasibility of c≥0c\ge0c≥0, Tc≤sTc\le sTc≤s to Corollary 2; without them the sets are empty.
  5. Eq. (13) is stated for U′\mathcal U'U′ as defined on p. 6 (not through the paper's set rewriting); the convexity of the fjf_jfj​ is kept as the paper's standing assumption and is not used.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the robust objective is the EReal supremum (or the residual-value set) over the uncertainty set, so no identity holds by unfolding, and no real sSup junk value enters a robust objective. Welcome contributions: the explicit worst-case disturbance in an arbitrary normed space, the absolute-norm duality lemma, and a finite-dimensional LP strong duality theorem, each reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • H. Xu, C. Caramanis, S. Mannor, Robust Regression and Lasso, arXiv:0811.1790v1, 2008; IEEE Transactions on Information Theory 56(7):3561–3574, 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/0811.1790v1, https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.2010.2048503
  • L. El Ghaoui, H. Lebret, Robust solutions to least-squares problems with uncertain data, SIAM Journal on Matrix Analysis and Applications 18(4):1035–1064, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895479896298130
  • A. Ben-Tal, L. El Ghaoui, A. Nemirovski, Robust Optimization, Princeton University Press, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400831050
  • R. Tibshirani, Regression shrinkage and selection via the lasso, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 58(1):267–288, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1996.tb02080.x
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Models for Minimax Stochastic Linear Optimization Problems with Risk Aversion 4: With Random Right-Hand Side and Known Dual Extreme Points, a Distribution in 𝒫 Attains Ẑ(x) = Ẑ_DD(x)Research Paper

Motivation

Two-stage stochastic linear programs model decisions taken before uncertainty is revealed (a first-stage plan xxx) followed by a corrective recourse action once it is. The classical model needs the full probability distribution of the uncertain data. In practice usually only estimates of a few moments are available, and the computed plan can be sensitive to the distribution that is assumed. The minimax (distributionally robust) approach replaces the single distribution by a class of distributions sharing given moments and optimizes against the worst member of the class. Bertsimas, Doan, Natarajan and Teo (Math. Oper. Res. 35(3), 2010) combine this with risk aversion, through a piecewise-linear disutility of the second-stage cost, and show which instances become semidefinite programs.

Besides the optimal value, the worst-case distribution itself is of practical interest: the paper proposes it as a natural distribution for stress-testing a first-stage solution (§4). This mission concerns the case where the right-hand side of the second stage is random, and formalizes the paper's construction of a worst-case distribution that is a genuine member of the moment class.

Setting

A first-stage decision x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn is feasible if x∈X={x:Ax=b, x≥0}x\in X=\{x : Ax=b,\ x\ge 0\}x∈X={x:Ax=b, x≥0}. Given a recourse matrix W∈Rr×dW\in\mathbb R^{r\times d}W∈Rr×d, a technology matrix T∈Rr×nT\in\mathbb R^{r\times n}T∈Rr×n, a constant cost vector q∈Rdq\in\mathbb R^dq∈Rd and a realized right-hand side h∈Rrh\in\mathbb R^rh∈Rr, the second-stage cost is the optimal value of the dual of the recourse linear program,

Q(h,x)=max⁡p (h−Tx)′ps.t.W′p≤q.\mathcal Q(h,x)=\max_{p}\ (h-Tx)'p\quad\text{s.t.}\quad W'p\le q .Q(h,x)=pmax​ (h−Tx)′ps.t.W′p≤q.

Risk aversion enters through the disutility U(t)=max⁡k=1,…,K(αkt+βk)\mathbb U(t)=\max_{k=1,\dots,K}(\alpha_k t+\beta_k)U(t)=maxk=1,…,K​(αk​t+βk​) with αk≥0\alpha_k\ge 0αk​≥0. The right-hand side h~\tilde hh~ is random; its distribution is only known to lie in the moment class

P={P:EP[h~]=μ, EP[h~h~′]=Q},\mathcal P=\{P : \mathbb E_P[\tilde h]=\mu,\ \mathbb E_P[\tilde h\tilde h']=Q\},P={P:EP​[h~]=μ, EP​[h~h~′]=Q},

and the worst-case expected disutility is Z^(x)=sup⁡P∈PEP[U(Q(h~,x))]\hat Z(x)=\sup_{P\in\mathcal P}\mathbb E_P[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde h,x))]Z^(x)=supP∈P​EP​[U(Q(h~,x))].

The standing assumptions are: complete recourse, {Ww:w≥0}=Rr\{Ww : w\ge 0\}=\mathbb R^r{Ww:w≥0}=Rr; a nonempty dual polyhedron {p:W′p≤q}\{p : W'p\le q\}{p:W′p≤q}; Q≻μμ′Q\succ\mu\mu'Q≻μμ′; and (Assumption 5) the extreme points p1,…,pNp_1,\dots,p_Np1​,…,pN​ of the dual polyhedron are known. Under these, the paper introduces the semidefinite program (16): over symmetric blocks indexed by pairs (k,i)(k,i)(k,i),

Z^DD(x)=max⁡ ∑k=1K∑i=1N(αkpi′vki+vk0i(βk−αkpi′Tx))  s.t.  ∑k,i(Vkivki(vki)′vk0i)=(Qμμ′1),  (Vkivki(vki)′vk0i)⪰0.\hat Z_{DD}(x)=\max\ \sum_{k=1}^K\sum_{i=1}^N\big(\alpha_k p_i'v_k^i+v_{k0}^i(\beta_k-\alpha_k p_i'Tx)\big) \ \ \text{s.t.}\ \ \sum_{k,i}\begin{pmatrix}V_k^i & v_k^i\\ (v_k^i)' & v_{k0}^i\end{pmatrix}=\begin{pmatrix}Q&\mu\\ \mu'&1\end{pmatrix},\ \ \begin{pmatrix}V_k^i & v_k^i\\ (v_k^i)' & v_{k0}^i\end{pmatrix}\succeq 0 .Z^DD​(x)=max k=1∑K​i=1∑N​(αk​pi′​vki​+vk0i​(βk​−αk​pi′​Tx))  s.t.  k,i∑​(Vki​(vki​)′​vki​vk0i​​)=(Qμ′​μ1​),  (Vki​(vki​)′​vki​vk0i​​)⪰0.

From a point of (16) the paper builds the mixed distribution Pm(x)P_m(x)Pm​(x), which with probability vk0iv_{k0}^ivk0i​ draws a normal vector with mean vki/vk0iv_k^i/v_{k0}^ivki​/vk0i​ and covariance (Vkivk0i−vki(vki)′)/(vk0i)2(V_k^iv_{k0}^i-v_k^i(v_k^i)')/(v_{k0}^i)^2(Vki​vk0i​−vki​(vki​)′)/(vk0i​)2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3 (p. 590)

For every x∈Xx\in Xx∈X there is P∈PP\in\mathcal PP∈P with

EP′[U(Q(h~,x))]≤EP[U(Q(h~,x))]=Z^(x)=Z^DD(x)∀P′∈P,\mathbb E_{P'}\big[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde h,x))\big]\le \mathbb E_{P}\big[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde h,x))\big]=\hat Z(x)=\hat Z_{DD}(x)\qquad\forall P'\in\mathcal P,EP′​[U(Q(h~,x))]≤EP​[U(Q(h~,x))]=Z^(x)=Z^DD​(x)∀P′∈P,

where the common value is the attained maximum of (16), and the expected disutility is integrable under every member of P\mathcal PP.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3.3, pp. 590–591)

  1. U(Q(h,x))=max⁡k,i(αk(h−Tx)′pi+βk)\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(h,x))=\max_{k,i}\big(\alpha_k(h-Tx)'p_i+\beta_k\big)U(Q(h,x))=maxk,i​(αk​(h−Tx)′pi​+βk​) for every hhh.
  2. Every P∈PP\in\mathcal PP∈P yields a feasible point of (16) of equal value; hence Z^(x)≤Z^DD(x)\hat Z(x)\le\hat Z_{DD}(x)Z^(x)≤Z^DD​(x).
  3. (16) has an optimal solution whose blocks have vk0i>0v_{k0}^i>0vk0i​>0 or vanish.
  4. For such a feasible point, Pm(x)∈PP_m(x)\in\mathcal PPm​(x)∈P.
  5. EPm(x)[U(Q(h~,x))]\mathbb E_{P_m(x)}[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde h,x))]EPm​(x)​[U(Q(h~,x))] is at least the objective value of (16) at that point.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.3 shows that, once the dual extreme points are known, the worst case over the moment class is attained, and by an explicit finite mixture of normal distributions read off an optimal solution of a semidefinite program. This contrasts with the random-objective case of the same paper (Theorem 2.2), where the bound is in general only approached by a sequence of distributions. The extremal distribution gives a concrete stress-test scenario for a candidate first-stage plan, and the identity Z^(x)=Z^DD(x)\hat Z(x)=\hat Z_{DD}(x)Z^(x)=Z^DD​(x) certifies the value of the inner worst-case problem without appeal to strong duality for the moment problem.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge no machine-checked version exists. A formal proof needs a measure-theoretic treatment of conditional moments on the cells of a piecewise-linear maximum, the existence of optima of a bounded semidefinite program, and moment computations for multivariate normal mixtures. These pieces are reusable well beyond this paper, for instance in other moment-based distributionally robust models.

Difficulty

The obvious route goes through moment-problem duality: dualize sup⁡P∈P\sup_{P\in\mathcal P}supP∈P​, reformulate the semi-infinite constraint as linear matrix inequalities, and dualize again. That route only gives the inequality chain up to a duality gap and says nothing about attainment over P\mathcal PP. The proof here avoids strong duality, but it must show two separate things: every distribution in P\mathcal PP maps to a feasible point of (16) without loss of value (this needs a measurable choice of the maximizing pair and the conditional moments on each cell), and the optimal point of (16) maps back to a distribution in P\mathcal PP whose value is at least the optimum. The second step fails on blocks with zero weight vk0i=0v_{k0}^i=0vk0i​=0, where no normal component can be formed; those blocks have to be removed from an optimal solution first.

Formalization scope

The Lean development works on Rr\mathbb R^rRr as Fin r → ℝ, with measures in place of the paper's densities. The moment class reuses the published definitions MomentDRO.Conf.HasSecondMoments, meanVec and secondMomentAbout P 0 (uncentred second moment). Q(h,x)\mathcal Q(h,x)Q(h,x), Z^(x)\hat Z(x)Z^(x) and Z^DD(x)\hat Z_{DD}(x)Z^DD​(x) are real sSups; every theorem that uses them states the relevant maximum or bound explicitly, so no statement depends on the junk value of an empty or unbounded supremum. Bordered matrices are Matrix.fromBlocks over Fin r ⊕ Fin 1 and ⪰0\succeq 0⪰0 is Matrix.PosSemidef. The normal components are Mathlib's multivariateGaussian, transported from EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin r); the mixture weights are ENNReal.ofReal vk0iv_{k0}^ivk0i​.

Readings of the page:

  • As printed, Assumption 2 (complete recourse) and Assumption 3 "for all qqq" are mutually inconsistent when r≥1r\ge 1r≥1. The formalization uses complete recourse and nonemptiness of {p:W′p≤q}\{p : W'p\le q\}{p:W′p≤q} at the one constant qqq of §3.
  • Assumption 1 is not used and is dropped; x∈Xx\in Xx∈X is kept as in the statement.
  • "Without loss of generality vk0i>0v_{k0}^i>0vk0i​>0" is read as: some optimal solution has every block either with vk0i>0v_{k0}^i>0vk0i​>0 or zero.
  • The printed "Vkivk0V_k^iv_{k0}Vki​vk0​", "vk02v_{k0}^2vk02​" and "with probability vk0v_{k0}vk0​" are read with the superscript iii.

The goal asserts that a maximizer over P\mathcal PP exists, not only an equation between suprema: an equation such as EP[⋅]=Z^(x)\mathbb E_P[\cdot]=\hat Z(x)EP​[⋅]=Z^(x) alone could hold through a junk value and is ruled out as the target. No strong-duality hypothesis is assumed, since the proof does not need one. Contributions welcome: the measurable argmax selection, compactness of the feasible set of (16), and second-moment computations for Gaussian mixtures.

Selected references

  • D. Bertsimas, X. V. Doan, K. Natarajan, C.-P. Teo, Models for Minimax Stochastic Linear Optimization Problems with Risk Aversion, Mathematics of Operations Research 35(3):580–602, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1100.0445
  • E. Delage, Y. Ye, Distributionally Robust Optimization Under Moment Uncertainty with Application to Data-Driven Problems, Operations Research 58(3):595–612, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1090.0741
  • J. Dupačová, The minimax approach to stochastic programming and an illustrative application, Stochastics 20(1):73–88, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1080/17442508708833436
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Models for Minimax Stochastic Linear Optimization Problems with Risk Aversion 2: With Random Objective, Z(x) = Z_D(x) = Z_DD(x) and Moment-Matching Distributions Attain Z(x) AsymptoticallyResearch Paper

Motivation

Two-stage stochastic linear programming chooses a first-stage decision xxx before a random parameter is revealed and pays an optimal second-stage (recourse) cost afterwards. The classical model fixes the distribution of the random parameter. In practice it is rarely known beyond a few moments, and a decision maker who is averse to risk does not evaluate the recourse cost by its plain expectation. Bertsimas, Doan, Natarajan and Teo (Math. Oper. Res. 35(3), 2010) take both points seriously: the distribution is only known to belong to the class of all distributions with given mean and second-moment matrix, the cost is passed through a convex piecewise-linear disutility, and the decision is evaluated against the worst distribution in the class.

Moment-based worst-case bounds go back to Scarf's newsvendor and to the Chebyshev-type bounds of the moment problem (Isii 1962; Bertsimas and Popescu 2005). Delage and Ye (Oper. Res. 58(3), 2010) showed that a broad class of such minimax problems is solvable in polynomial time by the ellipsoid method. For the case in which the uncertainty sits in the objective of the second-stage linear program, this paper gives a single semidefinite program (its Theorem 2.1, the subject of a companion mission) and, in §2.2, identifies the distributions that come arbitrarily close to the worst case. This mission is about the second result.

Setting

The first-stage region is X={x∈Rn:Ax=b, x≥0}X=\{x\in\mathbb R^n : Ax=b,\ x\ge0\}X={x∈Rn:Ax=b, x≥0}. For x∈Xx\in Xx∈X the recourse set is X(x)={w∈Rd:Ww=h−Tx, w≥0}X(x)=\{w\in\mathbb R^d : Ww=h-Tx,\ w\ge0\}X(x)={w∈Rd:Ww=h−Tx, w≥0} and the second-stage cost of an objective vector q∈Rdq\in\mathbb R^dq∈Rd is

Q(q,x)=min⁡w∈X(x)q′w.\mathcal Q(q,x)=\min_{w\in X(x)} q'w .Q(q,x)=w∈X(x)min​q′w.

The disutility is U(t)=max⁡k=1,…,K(αkt+βk)\mathbb U(t)=\max_{k=1,\dots,K}(\alpha_k t+\beta_k)U(t)=maxk=1,…,K​(αk​t+βk​) with αk≥0\alpha_k\ge0αk​≥0. The moment class P\mathcal PP consists of the distributions PPP of a random vector q~∈Rd\tilde q\in\mathbb R^dq~​∈Rd with EP[q~]=μ\mathbb E_P[\tilde q]=\muEP​[q~​]=μ and EP[q~q~′]=Q\mathbb E_P[\tilde q\tilde q']=QEP​[q~​q~​′]=Q. The worst-case value at xxx is

Z(x)=sup⁡P∈PEP[U(Q(q~,x))].Z(x)=\sup_{P\in\mathcal P}\mathbb E_P\big[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde q,x))\big].Z(x)=P∈Psup​EP​[U(Q(q~​,x))].

Its dual (6) is

ZD(x)=min⁡Y,y,y0 Q⋅Y+μ′y+y0s.t.q′Yq+q′y+y0≥U(Q(q,x))  ∀q∈Rd,Z_D(x)=\min_{Y,y,y_0}\ Q\cdot Y+\mu'y+y_0\quad\text{s.t.}\quad q'Yq+q'y+y_0\ge\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(q,x))\ \ \forall q\in\mathbb R^d ,ZD​(x)=Y,y,y0​min​ Q⋅Y+μ′y+y0​s.t.q′Yq+q′y+y0​≥U(Q(q,x))  ∀q∈Rd,

with YYY symmetric and Q⋅Y=∑ijQijYijQ\cdot Y=\sum_{ij}Q_{ij}Y_{ij}Q⋅Y=∑ij​Qij​Yij​. Its semidefinite reformulation (8) has the dual (9):

ZDD(x)=max⁡ ∑k=1K(h−Tx)′pk+βkvk0s.t.∑k=1K(Vkvkvk′vk0)=(Qμμ′1), (Vkvkvk′vk0)⪰0, W′pk≤αkvk.Z_{DD}(x)=\max\ \sum_{k=1}^K (h-Tx)'p_k+\beta_kv_{k0}\quad\text{s.t.}\quad \sum_{k=1}^K\begin{pmatrix}V_k&v_k\\ v_k'&v_{k0}\end{pmatrix}=\begin{pmatrix}Q&\mu\\ \mu'&1\end{pmatrix},\ \begin{pmatrix}V_k&v_k\\ v_k'&v_{k0}\end{pmatrix}\succeq0,\ W'p_k\le\alpha_kv_k .ZDD​(x)=max k=1∑K​(h−Tx)′pk​+βk​vk0​s.t.k=1∑K​(Vk​vk′​​vk​vk0​​)=(Qμ′​μ1​), (Vk​vk′​​vk​vk0​​)⪰0, W′pk​≤αk​vk​.

Its variables are scaled conditional moments: vk0v_{k0}vk0​ is the probability that the kkkth piece of U\mathbb UU is active, and vkv_kvk​, VkV_kVk​ are the first and second moments of q~\tilde qq~​ on that event, multiplied by vk0v_{k0}vk0​.

The standing assumptions are Assumption 3, {p∈Rr:W′p≤q}≠∅\{p\in\mathbb R^r : W'p\le q\}\ne\emptyset{p∈Rr:W′p≤q}=∅ for every qqq, so that Q(q,x)\mathcal Q(q,x)Q(q,x) is finite, and Assumption 4, Q−μμ′≻0Q-\mu\mu'\succ0Q−μμ′≻0. Recourse sets are assumed nonempty.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.2

For every x∈Xx\in Xx∈X there is a sequence Pj∈PP_j\in\mathcal PPj​∈P with EPj[U(Q(q~,x))]→Z(x)\mathbb E_{P_j}[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q(\tilde q,x))]\to Z(x)EPj​​[U(Q(q~​,x))]→Z(x), and

Z(x)=ZD(x)=ZDD(x),Z(x)=Z_D(x)=Z_{DD}(x),Z(x)=ZD​(x)=ZDD​(x),

where all three are finite optimal values: a supremum over a nonempty bounded-above set, an infimum over a nonempty bounded-below set, and a supremum over a nonempty bounded-above set.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.1: ZDD(x)≥Z(x)Z_{DD}(x)\ge Z(x)ZDD​(x)≥Z(x), in the form "each P∈PP\in\mathcal PP∈P gives a feasible point of (9) whose objective equals EP[U(Q)]\mathbb E_P[\mathbb U(\mathcal Q)]EP​[U(Q)]".
  2. (9) has an optimal solution.
  3. Q(⋅,x)\mathcal Q(\cdot,x)Q(⋅,x) is positively homogeneous and superadditive.
  4. If W′p≤αvW'p\le\alpha vW′p≤αv with α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0 then αQ(v,x)≥(h−Tx)′p\alpha\mathcal Q(v,x)\ge(h-Tx)'pαQ(v,x)≥(h−Tx)′p.
  5. Jensen: E[Q(r~,x)]≤Q(Er~,x)\mathbb E[\mathcal Q(\tilde r,x)]\le\mathcal Q(\mathbb E\tilde r,x)E[Q(r~,x)]≤Q(Er~,x), with Q(r~,x)\mathcal Q(\tilde r,x)Q(r~,x) integrable.
  6. An optimal solution of (9) can be chosen so that every block has vk0>0v_{k0}>0vk0​>0 or vanishes.
  7. Strong duality Z(x)=ZD(x)Z(x)=Z_D(x)Z(x)=ZD​(x) (§2.1).

Significance

Theorem 2.2 says that the semidefinite bound is tight and that the worst case is approached by explicit mixtures. With probability vk0v_{k0}vk0​ the cost vector sits at the conditional mean vk/vk0v_k/v_{k0}vk​/vk0​, and with a small probability it is perturbed by a large Gaussian. The construction tells which scenarios a minimax solution guards against. The paper's numerical section uses it to stress-test solutions computed under other distributional assumptions. For the risk-neutral case (K=1K=1K=1) the bound collapses to Jensen's bound min⁡w∈X(x)μ′w\min_{w\in X(x)}\mu'wminw∈X(x)​μ′w. For K>1K>1K>1 it is a combination of Jensen bounds, one per piece of the disutility.

Theorem 2.2 is proved in the paper; no part of it, nor the strong duality of the moment problem that it relies on, is formalized on the platform or, to our knowledge, elsewhere. The mission asks for machine-checked proofs of the identity Z=ZD=ZDDZ=Z_D=Z_{DD}Z=ZD​=ZDD​ and of the steps of the extremal construction. Several of these are reusable beyond this paper: weak and strong duality of moment problems, the existence of optimal solutions of moment-type semidefinite programs, and Jensen's inequality for the value function of a linear program.

Difficulty

Most of the argument is linear programming and bookkeeping. The step Z(x)=ZD(x)Z(x)=Z_D(x)Z(x)=ZD​(x) is a strong-duality theorem for an infinite-dimensional linear program over measures. The paper cites it from Isii's theory of the moment problem, and none of that theory exists in Mathlib. The construction of near-extremal distributions also needs care. A single distribution in P\mathcal PP generally cannot attain Z(x)Z(x)Z(x), so the bound is reached only along a family whose second moments are matched by rare, large perturbations. Lemma 2.1 needs measurable selections of an active piece of U\mathbb UU and of a dual optimal solution of the second-stage program as functions of qqq. When the optimal solution of (9) has zero-weight blocks, the mixture is undefined until the solution is first rearranged.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin d → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin r) (Fin d) ℝ, and distributions are probability measures on Fin d → ℝ with square-integrable coordinates. They are not densities as in the paper's (5). The moment class uses the published MomentDRO.Conf definitions, and E[q~q~′]\mathbb E[\tilde q\tilde q']E[q~​q~​′] is the uncentred second moment. The paper writes ppp both for the dimension of qqq and for dual vectors. Here the dimension is ddd and dual vectors are named π. Indices kkk are zero-based. Bordered matrices are Matrix.fromBlocks on Fin d ⊕ Fin 1 and ⪰0\succeq0⪰0 is Matrix.PosSemidef. Q\mathcal QQ is a real infimum and the optimal values are real sSup/sInf of value sets. Every statement that uses an optimal value also asserts IsLUB/IsGLB, so junk values cannot make a statement true.

As printed, Assumption 2 (complete recourse) and Assumption 3 for all qqq contradict each other whenever WWW has a row. The formalization keeps Assumption 3 for all qqq and replaces complete recourse by nonemptiness of X(x)X(x)X(x), which is what §2's proofs use. Assumption 1 is not used and is omitted. The hypotheses are jointly satisfiable, for example by W=IW=IW=I, T=0T=0T=0, h=0h=0h=0, μ=0\mu=0μ=0 and Q=IQ=IQ=I.

The sequence clause of Theorem 2.2 alone holds for every finite supremum, so it does not capture the theorem. The goal therefore also asserts the equalities Z=ZD=ZDDZ=Z_D=Z_{DD}Z=ZD​=ZDD​, with all three values genuine, and these carry the content. A formalization that drops them, or states them only through junk values, is ruled out.

A complete development needs the duality theory of the moment problem, Jensen's inequality for concave functions on Rd\mathbb R^dRd, compactness arguments for semidefinite feasible sets, and multivariate Gaussian mixtures (ProbabilityTheory.multivariateGaussian in Mathlib). Proofs of individual milestones are welcome. So is a general moment-problem duality theorem from which strong_duality follows.

Selected references

  • D. Bertsimas, X. V. Doan, K. Natarajan, C.-P. Teo, Models for Minimax Stochastic Linear Optimization Problems with Risk Aversion, Mathematics of Operations Research 35(3):580–602, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1100.0445
  • E. Delage, Y. Ye, Distributionally Robust Optimization Under Moment Uncertainty with Application to Data-Driven Problems, Operations Research 58(3):595–612, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1090.0741
  • K. Isii, On sharpness of Tchebycheff-type inequalities, Annals of the Institute of Statistical Mathematics 14:185–197, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02868641
  • D. Bertsimas, I. Popescu, Optimal Inequalities in Probability Theory: A Convex Optimization Approach, SIAM Journal on Optimization 15(3):780–804, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623401399903
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Quadratic and Semidefinite Programming Relaxations in Scheduling II: Randomized Rounding of the Time-Slot Convex Quadratic Relaxation (CQP) Is Within 2 for R | rᵢⱼ | Σ wⱼCⱼResearch Paper

Motivation

Scheduling jobs on unrelated parallel machines to minimize the total weighted completion time is a basic model of machine scheduling: each job may take a different time on each machine, and a job becomes available on a machine only at a machine-dependent release date. In the three-field notation the problem is R∣rij∣∑wjCjR \mid r_{ij} \mid \sum w_jC_jR∣rij​∣∑wj​Cj​. Already the sequencing problem on a single machine with release dates is strongly NP-hard, so the question is how well it can be approximated in polynomial time.

Timeline (as surveyed in §1 of the paper):

  • Phillips, Stein and Wein gave a performance guarantee of O(log⁡2n)O(\log^2 n)O(log2n) for a network-scheduling generalization.
  • Hall, Shmoys and Wein (1996/1997) gave the first constant factor, 16/316/316/3, from an interval-indexed linear programming relaxation (Math. Oper. Res. 22, 1997).
  • Schulz and Skutella (1997–1999) gave a randomized (2+ε)(2+\varepsilon)(2+ε)-approximation from a time-indexed linear programming relaxation in intervals of geometrically increasing length; its size depends on pmax⁡p_{\max}pmax​ and on ε\varepsilonε.
  • Skutella (J. ACM 48, 2001) replaced the linear program by a convex quadratic program in assignment variables of strongly polynomial size and showed, in §3, that randomized rounding of it is a 222-approximation.

This mission formalizes that last result.

Setting

There are nnn jobs JJJ and mmm machines. Job jjj has a weight wj≥0w_j \ge 0wj​≥0; on machine iii it has a processing time pij>0p_{ij} > 0pij​>0 and a release date rij≥0r_{ij} \ge 0rij​≥0. A nonpreemptive schedule runs every job without interruption on one machine, starting no earlier than its release date there, and each machine processes at most one job at a time. With completion times CjC_jCj​, the objective is ∑jwjCj\sum_j w_jC_j∑j​wj​Cj​.

Smith's order on machine iii: j≺ikj \prec_i kj≺i​k if wj/pij>wk/pikw_j/p_{ij} > w_k/p_{ik}wj​/pij​>wk​/pik​, or the ratios are equal and j<kj < kj<k.

Time slots. Sort the release dates on machine iii as ρi1≤⋯≤ρin\rho_{i_1} \le \dots \le \rho_{i_n}ρi1​​≤⋯≤ρin​​ and set ρin+1=∞\rho_{i_{n+1}} = \inftyρin+1​​=∞. The kkk-th time slot iki_kik​ holds the jobs started on machine iii within [ρik,ρik+1)[\rho_{i_k}, \rho_{i_{k+1}})[ρik​​,ρik+1​​). An assignment of jobs to slots is feasible if job jjj goes to a slot iki_kik​ with ρik≥rij\rho_{i_k} \ge r_{ij}ρik​​≥rij​. For assignment variables aikja_{i_kj}aik​j​, the slot starts are

si1=ρi1,sik+1=max⁡{ρik+1, sik+∑jaikjpij},s_{i_1} = \rho_{i_1}, \qquad s_{i_{k+1}} = \max\Big\{\rho_{i_{k+1}},\ s_{i_k} + \sum_j a_{i_kj}p_{ij}\Big\},si1​​=ρi1​​,sik+1​​=max{ρik+1​​, sik​​+j∑​aik​j​pij​},

and for a 0/1 assignment the completion time of j∈ikj \in i_kj∈ik​ is Cj=sik+pij+∑j′≺ij, j′∈ikpij′C_j = s_{i_k} + p_{ij} + \sum_{j' \prec_i j,\ j' \in i_k} p_{ij'}Cj​=sik​​+pij​+∑j′≺i​j, j′∈ik​​pij′​ (17).

(CQP). Minimize ZCQP(a)=∑jwjCˉj(a)Z_{CQP}(a) = \sum_j w_j \bar C_j(a)ZCQP​(a)=∑j​wj​Cˉj​(a) with

Cˉj(a)=∑i,kaikj(ρik+1+aikj2 pij+∑j′≺ijaikj′pij′)\bar C_j(a) = \sum_{i,k} a_{i_kj}\Big(\rho_{i_k} + \frac{1 + a_{i_kj}}{2}\,p_{ij} + \sum_{j' \prec_i j} a_{i_kj'}p_{ij'}\Big)Cˉj​(a)=i,k∑​aik​j​(ρik​​+21+aik​j​​pij​+j′≺i​j∑​aik​j′​pij′​)

subject to ∑i,kaikj=1\sum_{i,k} a_{i_kj} = 1∑i,k​aik​j​=1 (14), aikj=0a_{i_kj} = 0aik​j​=0 if ρik<rij\rho_{i_k} < r_{ij}ρik​​<rij​ (18), a≥0a \ge 0a≥0 (20), and ∑jaikjpij≤ρik+1−ρik\sum_j a_{i_kj}p_{ij} \le \rho_{i_{k+1}} - \rho_{i_k}∑j​aik​j​pij​≤ρik+1​​−ρik​​ (21). In matrix form the objective is bTa+12cTa+12aT(D+diag(c))ab^Ta + \tfrac12 c^Ta + \tfrac12 a^T(D + \mathrm{diag}(c))abTa+21​cTa+21​aT(D+diag(c))a, which is convex.

Randomized rounding. Each job jjj is put into exactly one slot iki_kik​, with probability aikja_{i_kj}aik​j​, the choices being pairwise independent across jobs. The resulting slot assignment is turned into a schedule by (15)–(17).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.4 (pp. 19–20), formal core

For every instance with p>0p > 0p>0, w≥0w \ge 0w≥0, r≥0r \ge 0r≥0:

  1. every feasible slot assignment yields a feasible schedule with completion times (17);
  2. for every (CQP)-feasible aaa and every pairwise independent rounding μ\muμ of aaa,
Eμ[∑jwjCj]≤2 ZCQP(a);E_\mu\Big[\sum_j w_jC_j\Big] \le 2\,Z_{CQP}(a);Eμ​[j∑​wj​Cj​]≤2ZCQP​(a);
  1. every feasible schedule SSS admits a (CQP)-feasible aaa with ZCQP(a)≤∑jwjCj(S)Z_{CQP}(a) \le \sum_j w_jC_j(S)ZCQP​(a)≤∑j​wj​Cj​(S).

The bound is stated for every feasible aaa, so it needs no optimum of (CQP), and with (3) it gives the positive half of Corollary 3.6.

Milestones

  • Lemma 3.1 (p. 15): an optimal schedule exists whose slots are sequenced by ≺i\prec_i≺i​ without interruption.
  • p. 16: the schedule built from a feasible slot assignment is feasible, with completion times (17).
  • Lemma 3.2 (p. 16): rebuilding such a schedule from its slot assignment gives a feasible schedule with the same property that completes no job later.
  • p. 17: for 0/1 assignments the relaxed completion times (19) equal (17).
  • Lemma 3.3 (p. 18): the quadratic programming relaxation has an optimal solution with sik=ρiks_{i_k} = \rho_{i_k}sik​​=ρik​​ for all i,ki, ki,k.
  • Proof of Lemma 3.5 (p. 20): Ej↦ik[sik]≤2ρikE_{j \mapsto i_k}[s_{i_k}] \le 2\rho_{i_k}Ej↦ik​​[sik​​]≤2ρik​​.
  • Lemma 3.5 (p. 20): E[Cj]≤2Cˉj(a)E[C_j] \le 2\bar C_j(a)E[Cj​]≤2Cˉj​(a) for every job.

Significance

The result gives a 222-approximation for R∣rij∣∑wjCjR \mid r_{ij} \mid \sum w_jC_jR∣rij​∣∑wj​Cj​ from a program of polynomial size, with a short analysis that holds job by job. The relaxation (CQP) is also the basis of §4, where the same rounding compares nonpreemptive with preemptive schedules, and its relaxation property bounds the optimum of (CQP) against the optimal schedule within a factor 222.

The result is proved in the paper; none of it is formalized. A formal development adds a checked model of release-date schedules and time slots on unrelated machines, the exchange argument behind Smith's rule in the presence of release dates, and a measure-free treatment of pairwise independent rounding. These pieces are reusable for other slot-based relaxations.

Difficulty

The analysis of Lemma 3.5 is short; the work lies in the reduction to slot assignments. Lemma 3.1 is an exchange argument, but swapping two jobs can push a job into a different time slot, so the naive bubble sort within a slot does not obviously terminate in a slot-sequenced schedule. Lemma 3.2 needs an induction across slots that accounts for empty slots and ties ρik=ρik+1\rho_{i_k} = \rho_{i_{k+1}}ρik​​=ρik+1​​. Lemma 3.3 is a shifting argument on fractional solutions whose objective change is a quadratic computation, and the step size printed on p. 18 must be divided by piȷ^p_{i\hat\jmath}pi^​​ to land exactly on sik=ρiks_{i_k} = \rho_{i_k}sik​​=ρik​​. The relaxation conjunct of the goal chains Lemmas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and the p. 17 identity.

Formalization scope

Jobs are Fin n, machines Fin m, and slots Fin m × Fin n, all 0-based. ≺i\prec_i≺i​ is cross-multiplied, which equals the page's ratio order because p>0p > 0p>0. ρ\rhoρ is the sorted tuple of release dates; ρin+1=∞\rho_{i_{n+1}} = \inftyρin+1​​=∞ is never represented by a real number. Constraint (21) is imposed only for slots before the last, and a job's slot is the largest kkk with ρik≤Sj\rho_{i_k} \le S_jρik​​≤Sj​. Schedules are a machine and a real start time per job; two jobs on one machine must satisfy Cj≤SkC_j \le S_kCj​≤Sk​ or Ck≤SjC_k \le S_jCk​≤Sj​. Randomized rounding is a probability weight on slot assignments with marginals aikja_{i_kj}aik​j​ and product joint probabilities for distinct jobs; full independence is not required, and the product weight is one instance. The standing assumptions pij>0p_{ij} > 0pij​>0, wj≥0w_j \ge 0wj​≥0, rij≥0r_{ij} \ge 0rij​≥0 of p. 2 are hypotheses of every theorem; Lemmas 3.1 and 3.3, which assert existence, also assume m≥1m \ge 1m≥1.

A statement of the bound alone, E≤2ZCQP(a)E \le 2 Z_{CQP}(a)E≤2ZCQP​(a), would say nothing about schedules: conjuncts 1 and 3 of the goal are what tie it to the scheduling problem, and neither may be dropped.

Not formalized: polynomial-time solvability of (CQP), the running time of the algorithm, the tightness half of Corollary 3.6, and the first sentence of Lemma 3.1 as a statement about every optimal schedule (false when some wj=0w_j = 0wj​=0).

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone; a general library of time-slot schedules; and the convexity of (22) (positive semidefiniteness of D+diag(c)D + \mathrm{diag}(c)D+diag(c)), which is not a milestone here.

Selected references

  • M. Skutella, Convex quadratic and semidefinite programming relaxations in scheduling, Journal of the ACM 48(2), 2001. https://doi.org/10.1145/375827.375840
  • L. A. Hall, A. S. Schulz, D. B. Shmoys and J. Wein, Scheduling to minimize average completion time: off-line and on-line approximation algorithms, Mathematics of Operations Research 22(3), 1997. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.22.3.513
  • A. S. Schulz and M. Skutella, Scheduling unrelated machines by randomized rounding, SIAM Journal on Discrete Mathematics 15(4), 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895480199357078
  • W. E. Smith, Various optimizers for single-stage production, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 3, 1956. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800030106
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Coordinate Gradient Descent Method for Nonsmooth Separable Minimization 3: The Local Lipschitzian Error Bound Holds for Polyhedral P with Quadratic or Composite f, and for Strongly Convex fResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics, signal processing and machine learning minimize the sum of a smooth function and a convex but nonsmooth one: ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularized least squares (the Lasso), bound-constrained problems, and group-sparse regression are standard examples. Tseng and Yun (Math. Program. Ser. B 117 (2009) 387–423) proposed the coordinate gradient descent (CGD) method for this class and proved that it converges linearly under a local Lipschitzian error bound, Assumption 2(a) of their paper. An assumption is only as useful as the list of problems known to satisfy it. Section 6 of the paper supplies that list, and this mission formalizes it.

Error bounds of this kind have a history in smooth constrained optimization. Luo and Tseng proved them for quadratic objectives over polyhedral sets (Luo–Tseng 1992, SIAM J. Optim.), for strongly convex functions composed with a linear map (Luo–Tseng 1992, SIAM J. Control Optim.), and for dual functionals of linearly constrained strictly convex programs (Luo–Tseng 1993, Math. Oper. Res.), and used them to derive linear rates for feasible descent methods (Luo–Tseng 1993, Ann. Oper. Res.). Tseng and Yun carry these results over to the nonsmooth problem (1) by reformulating it as a smooth problem over the epigraph of the nonsmooth part.

Setting

Throughout, Rn\mathbb R^nRn carries the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. The problem is

min⁡x  Fc(x)=f(x)+cP(x),(1)\min_x\; F_c(x) = f(x) + cP(x), \qquad (1)xmin​Fc​(x)=f(x)+cP(x),(1)

where c>0c > 0c>0, P:Rn→(−∞,∞]P:\mathbb R^n \to (-\infty,\infty]P:Rn→(−∞,∞] is proper, convex and lower semicontinuous with effective domain dom⁡P={x∣P(x)<∞}\operatorname{dom}P = \{x \mid P(x) < \infty\}domP={x∣P(x)<∞}, and fff is continuously differentiable on an open set containing dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP.

The residual at x∈dom⁡Px \in \operatorname{dom}Px∈domP is

dI(x)=arg⁡min⁡d{∇f(x)⊤d+12∥d∥2+cP(x+d)},d_I(x) = \arg\min_d \Big\{\nabla f(x)^\top d + \tfrac12\|d\|^2 + cP(x+d)\Big\},dI​(x)=argdmin​{∇f(x)⊤d+21​∥d∥2+cP(x+d)},

the unique minimizer of a strongly convex function. A point x∈dom⁡Px \in \operatorname{dom}Px∈domP is stationary if the one-sided directional derivative satisfies Fc′(x;d)≥0F_c'(x;d) \ge 0Fc′​(x;d)≥0 for every direction ddd; Xˉ\bar XXˉ denotes the set of stationary points and dist⁡(x,Xˉ)\operatorname{dist}(x,\bar X)dist(x,Xˉ) the distance to it. A point is stationary exactly when its residual vanishes.

Assumption 2(a) asks that Xˉ≠∅\bar X \neq \emptysetXˉ=∅ and that for every level ζ\zetaζ there be constants τ,ϵ>0\tau, \epsilon > 0τ,ϵ>0 with

dist⁡(x,Xˉ)≤τ∥dI(x)∥whenever Fc(x)≤ζ, ∥dI(x)∥≤ϵ.\operatorname{dist}(x,\bar X) \le \tau\|d_I(x)\| \quad\text{whenever } F_c(x) \le \zeta,\ \|d_I(x)\| \le \epsilon.dist(x,Xˉ)≤τ∥dI​(x)∥whenever Fc​(x)≤ζ, ∥dI​(x)∥≤ϵ.

Writing epi⁡P={(x,ξ)∣P(x)≤ξ}\operatorname{epi}P = \{(x,\xi) \mid P(x) \le \xi\}epiP={(x,ξ)∣P(x)≤ξ}, problem (1) is equivalent to the smooth problem min⁡{f(x)+cξ∣(x,ξ)∈epi⁡P}\min\{f(x) + c\xi \mid (x,\xi) \in \operatorname{epi}P\}min{f(x)+cξ∣(x,ξ)∈epiP} (41). Its projection residual at (x,ξ)(x,\xi)(x,ξ) is the optimal solution (d~,δ~)(\tilde d,\tilde\delta)(d~,δ~) of

min⁡(d,δ){∇f(x)⊤d+12∥d∥2+12δ2+cδ  ∣  (x+d,ξ+δ)∈epi⁡P}.(42)\min_{(d,\delta)}\Big\{\nabla f(x)^\top d + \tfrac12\|d\|^2 + \tfrac12\delta^2 + c\delta \;\Big|\; (x+d,\xi+\delta) \in \operatorname{epi}P\Big\}. \qquad (42)(d,δ)min​{∇f(x)⊤d+21​∥d∥2+21​δ2+cδ​(x+d,ξ+δ)∈epiP}.(42)

PPP is polyhedral if epi⁡P\operatorname{epi}PepiP is the solution set of finitely many linear inequalities in (x,ξ)(x,\xi)(x,ξ); fff is quadratic if f(x)=12x⊤Ax+b⊤x+c0f(x) = \tfrac12 x^\top Ax + b^\top x + c_0f(x)=21​x⊤Ax+b⊤x+c0​ with AAA symmetric, not necessarily positive semidefinite. The four problem classes are:

  • C1: fff quadratic, PPP polyhedral;
  • C2: f(x)=g(Ex)+q⊤xf(x) = g(Ex) + q^\top xf(x)=g(Ex)+q⊤x with ggg strongly convex and differentiable on Rm\mathbb R^mRm, ∇g\nabla g∇g Lipschitz, PPP polyhedral;
  • C3: f(x)=max⁡y∈Y{(Ex)⊤y−g(y)}+q⊤xf(x) = \max_{y\in Y}\{(Ex)^\top y - g(y)\} + q^\top xf(x)=maxy∈Y​{(Ex)⊤y−g(y)}+q⊤x with YYY polyhedral and ggg as in C2, PPP polyhedral;
  • C4: fff strongly convex with ∇f\nabla f∇f Lipschitz on dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP (condition (22)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4 (p. 412)

(Xˉ≠∅ ∧ (C1∨C2∨C3)) ∨ C4  ⟹  Assumption 2(a).\Big(\bar X \neq \emptyset \ \wedge\ (\mathrm{C1} \vee \mathrm{C2} \vee \mathrm{C3})\Big) \ \vee\ \mathrm{C4} \;\Longrightarrow\; \text{Assumption 2(a)}.(Xˉ=∅ ∧ (C1∨C2∨C3)) ∨ C4⟹Assumption 2(a).

Under C4, nonemptiness of Xˉ\bar XXˉ is part of the conclusion. The constants τ,ϵ\tau, \epsilonτ,ϵ are existential, so the goal does not depend on any particular estimate.

Milestone: Lemma 6 (p. 410)

If PPP is Lipschitz on dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP with constant KKK, there is κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0 depending only on KKK with

∥(d~,δ~)∥≤κ ∥dI(x)∥(x∈dom⁡P, ξ=P(x)).\|(\tilde d,\tilde\delta)\| \le \kappa\,\|d_I(x)\| \qquad (x \in \operatorname{dom}P,\ \xi = P(x)).∥(d~,δ~)∥≤κ∥dI​(x)∥(x∈domP, ξ=P(x)).

Milestone: Lemma 7 (p. 411)

If Xˉ≠∅\bar X \neq \emptysetXˉ=∅ and C1, C2 or C3 holds, then for every ζ\zetaζ there are τ′,ϵ′>0\tau', \epsilon' > 0τ′,ϵ′>0 with

dist⁡(x,Xˉ)≤τ′∥(d~,δ~)∥whenever Fc(x)≤ζ, ∥(d~,δ~)∥≤ϵ′,(44)\operatorname{dist}(x,\bar X) \le \tau'\|(\tilde d,\tilde\delta)\| \quad\text{whenever } F_c(x) \le \zeta,\ \|(\tilde d,\tilde\delta)\| \le \epsilon', \qquad (44)dist(x,Xˉ)≤τ′∥(d~,δ~)∥whenever Fc​(x)≤ζ, ∥(d~,δ~)∥≤ϵ′,(44)

where (d~,δ~)(\tilde d,\tilde\delta)(d~,δ~) solves (42) with ξ=P(x)\xi = P(x)ξ=P(x).

A further item, not a milestone, states the remark after Assumption 2 (p. 404) that Assumption 2(b) (stationary points with different objective values are uniformly separated) holds whenever fff is convex.

Significance

Theorem 4 is what makes the linear convergence theorem of the paper (Theorem 2, the subject of the second mission of this series) applicable. Through C1 it covers every problem with a quadratic fff and a polyhedral PPP, including the Lasso and ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularized or bound-constrained quadratic programs, without convexity of fff. Through C2 it covers losses of the form g(Ex)g(Ex)g(Ex) with ggg strongly convex, such as least squares 12∥Ex−b∥2\tfrac12\|Ex - b\|^221​∥Ex−b∥2, where fff itself is not strongly convex because EEE may have a nontrivial kernel. These error bounds became a standard tool for linear rates of proximal and coordinate methods without strong convexity.

The paper's result is proved, but Lemma 7 is proved by citation: it applies three error bounds of Luo and Tseng to the reformulation (41). A complete formalization therefore requires those error bounds for smooth problems over polyhedral sets, which are not in Mathlib. To our knowledge none of the results of this mission has a machine-checked proof.

Difficulty

Lemma 6 and the C4 case of Theorem 4 are short inequality arguments. The difficulty is Lemma 7. The natural first idea, proving an error bound from strong convexity, fails for C1–C3: fff may be nonconvex (C1) or have a degenerate Hessian (C2, C3), and the objective f(x)+cξf(x) + c\xif(x)+cξ of (41) is never strongly convex in (x,ξ)(x,\xi)(x,ξ). What replaces strong convexity is the polyhedral structure of epi⁡P\operatorname{epi}PepiP, and the cited Luo–Tseng error bounds that exploit it are substantial results in their own right, each of which has to be established for a projection residual over a general polyhedron in Rn+1\mathbb R^{n+1}Rn+1.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with indices 0,…,n−10,\dots,n-10,…,n−1. PPP is the pair (D,P)(D, P)(D,P), its effective domain and its finite values there, with "proper, convex, lsc" given by the published ProxNewton.Inexact.IsProperClosedConvex. The value +∞+\infty+∞ is never computed: every statement quantifies over x∈Dx \in Dx∈D, and membership in epi⁡P\operatorname{epi}PepiP is x + d ∈ D ∧ P (x + d) ≤ ξ + δ. dI(x)d_I(x)dI​(x) is a chosen minimizer of its subproblem, which at x∈Dx \in Dx∈D is the paper's unique one. The solutions of (42) enter through a predicate, and every bound is asserted for every optimal solution. Stationarity is the liminf form of Fc′(x;d)≥0F_c'(x;d) \ge 0Fc′​(x;d)≥0. dist⁡\operatorname{dist}dist is the infimum distance. Assumption 2(a) quantifies over every real ζ\zetaζ, which agrees with the paper's "ζ≥min⁡Fc\zeta \ge \min F_cζ≥minFc​" because the condition is vacuous below inf⁡Fc\inf F_cinfFc​. In Lemma 6 the constant κ\kappaκ is quantified before the dimension and the data, so it depends on the Lipschitz constant only.

Explicit choices relative to the printed text:

  • In C4, strong convexity and (22) are required on dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP only, since fff is only assumed smooth near dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP. This hypothesis is weaker than the paper's, so the formal theorem is at least as strong.
  • In C2 and C3, EEE is a continuous linear map Rn→Rm\mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mRn→Rm (equivalently an m×nm \times nm×n matrix). Strong convexity has a positive modulus and ∇g\nabla g∇g is globally Lipschitz.
  • In C3, the maximum must be attained at every xxx, which forces Y≠∅Y \neq \emptysetY=∅, as the paper's formula presumes.
  • Assumption 2(b) for convex fff is stated with convexity on dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP.

A polyhedrality notion that admits only affine or constant PPP, an Assumption 2(a) whose constants are chosen after xxx, and a Lemma 7 whose residual is dI(x)d_I(x)dI​(x) instead of the solution of (42) would all trivialize or change the statements. The encoding rules out each of them: polyhedral means a finite system of linear inequalities in (x,ξ)(x,\xi)(x,ξ), the constants precede xxx, and Lemma 7 is stated for (42).

Welcome contributions: proofs of Lemma 6 and of the C4 case; Lipschitz continuity of polyhedral functions on their domain (Rockafellar–Wets, Example 9.35); the Luo–Tseng error bounds for affine variational inequalities and for composite strongly convex objectives over polyhedra, which can be reused well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • P. Tseng, S. Yun, A coordinate gradient descent method for nonsmooth separable minimization, Math. Program. Ser. B 117 (2009) 387–423. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-007-0170-0
  • Z.-Q. Luo, P. Tseng, Error bounds and the convergence analysis of matrix splitting algorithms for the affine variational inequality problem, SIAM J. Optim. 2 (1992) 43–54. https://doi.org/10.1137/0802004
  • Z.-Q. Luo, P. Tseng, On the linear convergence of descent methods for convex essentially smooth minimization, SIAM J. Control Optim. 30 (1992) 408–425. https://doi.org/10.1137/0330025
  • Z.-Q. Luo, P. Tseng, On the convergence rate of dual ascent methods for linearly constrained convex minimization, Math. Oper. Res. 18 (1993) 846–867. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.4.846
  • Z.-Q. Luo, P. Tseng, Error bounds and convergence analysis of feasible descent methods: a general approach, Ann. Oper. Res. 46 (1993) 157–178. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02096261
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Coordinate Gradient Descent Method for Nonsmooth Separable Minimization 2: Under a Local Lipschitzian Error Bound, CGD with the Restricted Gauss–Seidel Rule Converges LinearlyResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics, signal processing and machine learning minimize the sum of a smooth loss and a convex, nonsmooth, separable regularizer: smooth optimization with ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularization, bound-constrained optimization, the group Lasso and, through duality, support vector regression are special cases listed in §1 of the paper discussed below. For such problems, methods that update one coordinate, or one small block of coordinates, at a time are often the method of choice, because each update is cheap and exploits separability.

Paul Tseng and Sangwoon Yun (Math. Program. Ser. B 117 (2009) 387–423) introduced the coordinate gradient descent (CGD) method for this class: at each iteration it minimizes a quadratic model of the smooth part plus the exact nonsmooth part over a chosen block of coordinates, then takes an Armijo step. Their paper proves global convergence (Theorem 1) and, under a local error bound, linear convergence (Theorems 2 and 3). This mission is the second of a three-mission series on the paper; it targets the linear convergence theorem for the cyclic (Gauss–Seidel-type) choice of blocks.

The analysis follows Luo and Tseng's error-bound framework for smooth constrained problems (Ann. Oper. Res. 46 (1993) 157–178), which established linear rates for feasible descent methods without strong convexity. Tseng and Yun extend that framework to a nonsmooth convex term.

Setting

Let ℜn\Re^nℜn carry the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, let N={1,…,n}\mathcal N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n}, and for J⊆N\mathcal J\subseteq\mathcal NJ⊆N let xJx_{\mathcal J}xJ​ be the subvector of coordinates in J\mathcal JJ. The problem (1) is

min⁡x Fc(x)=f(x)+cP(x),\min_x\ F_c(x)=f(x)+cP(x),xmin​ Fc​(x)=f(x)+cP(x),

where c>0c>0c>0, P:ℜn→(−∞,∞]P:\Re^n\to(-\infty,\infty]P:ℜn→(−∞,∞] is proper, convex and lower semicontinuous, and fff is continuously differentiable on an open set containing dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP.

Given x∈dom⁡Px\in\operatorname{dom}Px∈domP, a nonempty block J\mathcal JJ and a symmetric positive definite matrix HHH, the direction (6) is

dH(x;J)=arg⁡min⁡d{∇f(x)Td+12dTHd+cP(x+d) ∣ dj=0 ∀j∉J}.d_H(x;\mathcal J)=\arg\min_d\Big\{\nabla f(x)^Td+\tfrac12d^THd+cP(x+d)\ \Big|\ d_j=0\ \forall j\notin\mathcal J\Big\}.dH​(x;J)=argdmin​{∇f(x)Td+21​dTHd+cP(x+d) ​ dj​=0 ∀j∈/J}.

The CGD method starts at x0∈dom⁡Px^0\in\operatorname{dom}Px0∈domP, chooses at each iteration kkk a block Jk\mathcal J^kJk and a matrix HkH^kHk, computes dk=dHk(xk;Jk)d^k=d_{H^k}(x^k;\mathcal J^k)dk=dHk​(xk;Jk), and sets xk+1=xk+αkdkx^{k+1}=x^k+\alpha^kd^kxk+1=xk+αkdk. The Armijo rule takes αk\alpha^kαk as the largest element of {αinitkβj}j≥0\{\alpha^k_{\rm init}\beta^j\}_{j\ge0}{αinitk​βj}j≥0​ with

Fc(xk+αkdk)≤Fc(xk)+αkσΔk,Δk=∇f(xk)Tdk+γ dkTHkdk+cP(xk+dk)−cP(xk),F_c(x^k+\alpha^kd^k)\le F_c(x^k)+\alpha^k\sigma\Delta^k,\qquad \Delta^k=\nabla f(x^k)^Td^k+\gamma\,d^{kT}H^kd^k+cP(x^k+d^k)-cP(x^k),Fc​(xk+αkdk)≤Fc​(xk)+αkσΔk,Δk=∇f(xk)Tdk+γdkTHkdk+cP(xk+dk)−cP(xk),

with 0<β,σ<10<\beta,\sigma<10<β,σ<1 and 0≤γ<10\le\gamma<10≤γ<1. The restricted Gauss–Seidel rule (12) asks for indices 0=t0<t1<⋯0=t_0<t_1<\cdots0=t0​<t1​<⋯ (the set T\mathcal TT) such that the blocks used during each cycle ti≤k<ti+1t_i\le k<t_{i+1}ti​≤k<ti+1​ are pairwise disjoint and cover N\mathcal NN. PPP is block-separable with respect to J\mathcal JJ if P(x)=PJ(xJ)+PJC(xJC)P(x)=P_{\mathcal J}(x_{\mathcal J})+P_{\mathcal J^C}(x_{\mathcal J^C})P(x)=PJ​(xJ​)+PJC​(xJC​).

The analysis uses three assumptions: ∇f\nabla f∇f is LLL-Lipschitz on dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP (22); Assumption 1, λˉI⪰Hk⪰λ‾I\bar\lambda I\succeq H^k\succeq\underline\lambda IλˉI⪰Hk⪰λ​I with 0<λ‾≤λˉ0<\underline\lambda\le\bar\lambda0<λ​≤λˉ; and Assumption 2. Writing Xˉ\bar XXˉ for the set of stationary points of FcF_cFc​ and dI(x)d_I(x)dI​(x) for the full direction with H=IH=IH=I, Assumption 2 says (a) Xˉ≠∅\bar X\ne\emptysetXˉ=∅ and the local Lipschitzian error bound dist⁡(x,Xˉ)≤τ∥dI(x)∥\operatorname{dist}(x,\bar X)\le\tau\|d_I(x)\|dist(x,Xˉ)≤τ∥dI​(x)∥ holds on every level set {Fc≤ζ}\{F_c\le\zeta\}{Fc​≤ζ} wherever ∥dI(x)∥≤ϵ\|d_I(x)\|\le\epsilon∥dI​(x)∥≤ϵ; (b) stationary points with different objective values are at least a fixed distance δ>0\delta>0δ>0 apart.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2(b)

Under (22), Assumptions 1 and 2, the restricted Gauss–Seidel rule, block-separability of PPP with respect to every Jk\mathcal J^kJk, and Armijo steps with sup⁡kαinitk≤1\sup_k\alpha^k_{\rm init}\le1supk​αinitk​≤1 and inf⁡kαinitk>0\inf_k\alpha^k_{\rm init}>0infk​αinitk​>0:

{Fc(xk)}↓−∞or({Fc(xk)}T Q-linear and {xk}T R-linear).\{F_c(x^k)\}\downarrow-\infty\quad\text{or}\quad\big(\{F_c(x^k)\}_{\mathcal T}\ \text{Q-linear}\ \text{and}\ \{x^k\}_{\mathcal T}\ \text{R-linear}\big).{Fc​(xk)}↓−∞or({Fc​(xk)}T​ Q-linear and {xk}T​ R-linear).

No rate constant is fixed: the goal asserts the shape of the convergence, so it is not invalidated by sharper constants.

Milestones

Lemma 4 (Hölder dependence of the subproblem's solution on its linear term), Lemma 5(a) (a per-block variational inequality), Lemma 5(b) (an explicit stepsize at which the Armijo test passes), Theorem 1(f) (Armijo stepsizes bounded away from zero, Δk→0\Delta^k\to0Δk→0, dk→0d^k\to0dk→0), and Theorem 2(a) (the residual ∥dI(xk)∥\|d_I(x^k)\|∥dI​(xk)∥ at the start of a cycle is bounded by the step lengths of the cycle).

Significance

Theorem 2(b) gives a linear rate for a block coordinate method on a nonsmooth, possibly nonconvex composite problem without strong convexity: the rate follows from the error bound, which holds for a large class of problems studied in §6 of the paper (the third mission of this series).

The theorem is proved in the paper; none of it has been machine-checked, as far as a search of the Prove2Me library shows. Formalizing it requires a reusable treatment of extended-valued convex functions through their effective domains, of the coordinate-restricted proximal subproblem, and of the Armijo rule for composite objectives. The milestones Lemma 4 and Lemma 5 are self-contained facts about this subproblem and are reusable for other proximal coordinate methods.

Difficulty

The classical route to a linear rate, as in Luo and Tseng's smooth analysis, derives Fc(xk+1)−υˉ≤τ′∥xk+1−xk∥2F_c(x^{k+1})-\bar\upsilon\le\tau'\|x^{k+1}-x^k\|^2Fc​(xk+1)−υˉ≤τ′∥xk+1−xk∥2 from the error bound, where υˉ\bar\upsilonυˉ is the limit value. With a nonsmooth PPP this inequality is not available: the authors say so on p. 405, and work with −Δk-\Delta^k−Δk in place of the quadratic term. A second obstacle is that the error bound controls the full residual dI(xk)d_I(x^k)dI​(xk), while each iteration only computes a block direction at a different point; relating the two over a cycle needs the disjointness of the blocks in the restricted rule and block-separability of PPP. Neither the global analysis nor the error bound alone gives the rate.

Formalization scope

ℜn\Re^nℜn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with 0-based coordinates. The extended-valued PPP is encoded as a pair: its effective domain D=dom⁡PD=\operatorname{dom}PD=domP and its finite values on DDD, with "proper convex lsc" given by the published definition ProxNewton.Inexact.IsProperClosedConvex; FcF_cFc​ is never evaluated off DDD, and every statement carries membership in DDD explicitly. The direction dH(x;J)d_H(x;\mathcal J)dH​(x;J) is the unique minimizer of (6) when x∈Dx\in Dx∈D and H≻0H\succ0H≻0 (chosen by Classical.epsilon), and runs of the method carry the minimizer property itself. The Armijo rule takes the first admissible exponent jjj. T\mathcal TT is a strictly increasing map ttt with t0=0t_0=0t0​=0. Stationarity is Fc′(x;d)≥0F_c'(x;d)\ge0Fc′​(x;d)≥0 for all ddd, in liminf form. In Assumption 2, dist⁡\operatorname{dist}dist is the infimum distance and "for any ζ≥min⁡Fc\zeta\ge\min F_cζ≥minFc​" is "for every real ζ\zetaζ" (equivalent, since the condition is empty below inf⁡Fc\inf F_cinfFc​). Q-linear convergence includes convergence of the sequence; R-linear convergence is ∥xti−xˉ∥≤Cqi\|x^{t_i}-\bar x\|\le Cq^i∥xti​−xˉ∥≤Cqi with q<1q<1q<1. The rates in the goal are along T\mathcal TT, as the paper states.

Explicit choices relative to the printed text:

  • Theorem 2(a) is corrected. As printed, ∥dI(xk)∥≤sup⁡jαj C rk\|d_I(x^k)\|\le\sup_j\alpha^j\,C\,r^k∥dI​(xk)∥≤supj​αjCrk fails for small constant stepsizes and fails without block-separability (counterexamples in the item's statement). The milestone states ∥dI(xk)∥≤max⁡{1,sup⁡jαj} C rk\|d_I(x^k)\|\le\max\{1,\sup_j\alpha^j\}\,C\,r^k∥dI​(xk)∥≤max{1,supj​αj}Crk under block-separability of PPP with respect to every Jk\mathcal J^kJk (both are what the paper's proof gives and what Theorem 2(b) supplies), with the iterates in dom⁡P\operatorname{dom}PdomP, and with CCC quantified before the problem data, so it depends only on n,L,λ‾,λˉn,L,\underline\lambda,\bar\lambdan,L,λ​,λˉ.
  • Lemma 5(b)'s range 0≤α≤min⁡{1,2λ‾(1−σ+σγ)/L}0\le\alpha\le\min\{1,2\underline\lambda(1-\sigma+\sigma\gamma)/L\}0≤α≤min{1,2λ​(1−σ+σγ)/L} is stated as 0≤α≤10\le\alpha\le10≤α≤1 and αL≤2λ‾(1−σ+σγ)\alpha L\le2\underline\lambda(1-\sigma+\sigma\gamma)αL≤2λ​(1−σ+σγ), so that L=0L=0L=0 gives [0,1][0,1][0,1] as on paper rather than {0}\{0\}{0}.
  • Lemma 5(a) holds for every decomposition of PPP in (20), and xˉ\bar xxˉ ranges over dom⁡PJ\operatorname{dom}P_{\mathcal J}domPJ​ (outside it the left side is −∞-\infty−∞).
  • "lim⁡Fc(xk)>−∞\lim F_c(x^k)>-\inftylimFc​(xk)>−∞" is "the values Fc(xk)F_c(x^k)Fc​(xk) are bounded below"; "{Fc(xk)}↓−∞\{F_c(x^k)\}\downarrow-\infty{Fc​(xk)}↓−∞" is "nonincreasing and tending to −∞-\infty−∞"; suprema and infima of stepsizes are explicit bounds.

A statement that replaces Assumption 2 by strong convexity, claims a rate along the whole sequence rather than along T\mathcal TT, or asserts the Q-linear contraction without convergence to a limit is not this theorem and is out of scope.

Lemma 1, the claim after (10), Lemma 3 and Theorem 1(a), which the proof also uses, are milestones of the first mission of this series and are not restated here. Theorem 3 (the same conclusion along the whole sequence for the Gauss–Southwell-q rule) is not included: its proof is omitted in the paper. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, and general facts about the coordinate-restricted proximal subproblem (existence and uniqueness of dH(x;J)d_H(x;\mathcal J)dH​(x;J), optimality conditions) that the milestones rely on.

Selected references

  • P. Tseng and S. Yun, A coordinate gradient descent method for nonsmooth separable minimization, Mathematical Programming Ser. B 117 (2009) 387–423. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-007-0170-0
  • Z.-Q. Luo and P. Tseng, Error bounds and convergence analysis of feasible descent methods: a general approach, Annals of Operations Research 46 (1993) 157–178. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02096261
  • J. M. Ortega and W. C. Rheinboldt, Iterative Solution of Nonlinear Equations in Several Variables, Academic Press, 1970, Chap. 9 (Q- and R-linear convergence). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719468
  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Coordinate Gradient Descent Method for Nonsmooth Separable Minimization 1: With the Armijo Rule and the Generalized Gauss–Seidel Rule, Every Cluster Point of the CGD Iterates Is StationaryResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization models combine a smooth loss with a convex penalty or constraint. The penalty can be nonsmooth: an absolute-value penalty encourages sparse solutions, while an indicator function enforces a feasible set. A coordinate gradient descent (CGD) method updates selected coordinates by minimizing a quadratic model and then applies a line search. Tseng and Yun studied this method for an extended-valued convex penalty, including penalties that separate by blocks of coordinates. Their global convergence result addresses a basic question for such an iteration: if its iterates have an accumulation point, must that point satisfy the first-order stationarity condition? The result and examples appear in Tseng and Yun (2009).

Coordinate updates are appealing when changing a small block is cheaper than changing the whole vector. Their convergence is delicate when the penalty is nonsmooth: a direction can be useful on one block without revealing whether the full point is stationary. The paper's Theorem 1(e) establishes a guarantee for a generalized Gauss–Seidel selection rule and a block-separable penalty. The authors note that this rules out cycling on Powell's coordinate-minimization example under their stated conditions Tseng and Yun (2009), p. 404.

Setting

Let x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn, c>0c>0c>0, and let P:Rn→(−∞,+∞]P:\mathbb R^n\to(-\infty,+\infty]P:Rn→(−∞,+∞] be proper, convex and lower semicontinuous. Its effective domain D=dom⁡PD=\operatorname{dom}PD=domP contains precisely the points where PPP is finite. Let fff be continuously differentiable on an open set containing DDD. The objective is Fc(x)=f(x)+cP(x)F_c(x)=f(x)+cP(x)Fc​(x)=f(x)+cP(x), with value +∞+\infty+∞ outside DDD. No convexity of fff is assumed.

At iteration kkk, choose a nonempty set of coordinates Jk\mathcal J^kJk and a positive-definite symmetric matrix HkH^kHk. The search direction dkd^kdk minimizes

∇f(xk)⊤d+12d⊤Hkd+cP(xk+d)subject to dj=0 for j∉Jk.\nabla f(x^k)^\top d+\tfrac12 d^\top H^k d+cP(x^k+d) \quad\text{subject to }d_j=0\text{ for }j\notin\mathcal J^k.∇f(xk)⊤d+21​d⊤Hkd+cP(xk+d)subject to dj​=0 for j∈/Jk.

The next iterate is xk+1=xk+αkdkx^{k+1}=x^k+\alpha^k d^kxk+1=xk+αkdk. The Armijo rule tests the geometric sequence αinitkβj\alpha^k_{\mathrm{init}}\beta^jαinitk​βj and takes its largest accepted member, using the paper's decrease quantity Δk=∇f(xk)⊤dk+γ(dk)⊤Hkdk+cP(xk+dk)−cP(xk)\Delta^k=\nabla f(x^k)^\top d^k+\gamma(d^k)^\top H^kd^k+cP(x^k+d^k)-cP(x^k)Δk=∇f(xk)⊤dk+γ(dk)⊤Hkdk+cP(xk+dk)−cP(xk). Its parameters satisfy αinitk>0\alpha^k_{\mathrm{init}}>0αinitk​>0, 0<β,σ<10<\beta,\sigma<10<β,σ<1, and 0≤γ<10\le\gamma<10≤γ<1. The accepted step obeys Fc(xk+1)≤Fc(xk)+σαkΔkF_c(x^{k+1})\le F_c(x^k)+\sigma\alpha^k\Delta^kFc​(xk+1)≤Fc​(xk)+σαkΔk.

The generalized Gauss–Seidel rule means that some fixed number T≥1T\ge1T≥1 of consecutive coordinate sets covers every coordinate, starting at every iteration. The penalty is block-separable with respect to Jk\mathcal J^kJk when it is the sum of a proper closed convex function of the selected coordinates and another of their complement. A point xˉ\bar xxˉ is stationary when it lies in DDD and the one-sided directional derivative Fc′(xˉ;v)F_c'(\bar x;v)Fc′​(xˉ;v) is nonnegative for every direction v∈Rnv\in\mathbb R^nv∈Rn.

Formalization targets

Global convergence under generalized Gauss–Seidel selection

The goal is Theorem 1(e) Tseng and Yun (2009), p. 399. Under the CGD and Armijo rules, Assumption 1's uniform matrix bounds, a positive lower bound on the initial trial steps, block separability for each chosen coordinate set, and a finite upper bound on the accepted steps,

xˉ a cluster point of {xk}k≥0⟹Fc′(xˉ;v)≥0 for every v∈Rn.\bar x\text{ a cluster point of }\{x^k\}_{k\ge0} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad F_c'(\bar x;v)\ge0\text{ for every }v\in\mathbb R^n.xˉ a cluster point of {xk}k≥0​⟹Fc′​(xˉ;v)≥0 for every v∈Rn.

The mission milestones state the paper's Lemma 1, its Armijo existence claim after equation (10), Lemmas 2 and 3, and Theorem 1(a) and (b). They connect the direction subproblem, descent, stationarity and subsequence behavior to the goal. The theorem asserts stationarity of every cluster point; it does not assert that a cluster point exists or that the full sequence converges.

Significance

The result supplies a global first-order guarantee for a block update method even when the smooth part fff is nonconvex. It applies to extended-valued convex penalties, so the same statement covers both nonsmooth regularization and constraints represented by indicator functions. The bounded-window coverage condition allows varying coordinate sets rather than a fixed cyclic schedule Tseng and Yun (2009), Theorem 1(e).

The paper proves the theorem. This mission asks for a machine-checked Lean proof of that known claim and its selected supporting results. The reusable output includes a precise interface for an extended-valued penalty, the exact quadratic coordinate subproblem, Armijo backtracking with first accepted exponent, and the distinction between a convergent subsequence and a cluster point. The current draft statements compile with proof placeholders; they are proof obligations, not completed machine-checked results.

Difficulty

The descent bound alone controls decrease in objective value; it does not directly show that every coordinate has a vanishing stationarity residual. The coordinate set may vary at each iteration, and the penalty need only separate with respect to the current block. A cluster point may be reached along a subsequence that samples only one of those blocks. The argument therefore has to connect behavior along a convergent subsequence to nearby iterations within a full coverage window. The nonsmooth penalty also prevents replacing directional stationarity by a statement solely about an ordinary gradient.

Formalization scope

Vectors use EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and its Euclidean norm; Fin n starts at zero, whereas the paper numbers coordinates from one. A penalty is represented by its effective domain DDD and finite values PPP on D,usingthepublished‘ProxNewton.Inexact.IsProperClosedConvex‘definition.Everyobjectivecomparisonincludesdomainmembership;valuesoutsideD, using the published `ProxNewton.Inexact.IsProperClosedConvex` definition. Every objective comparison includes domain membership; values outside D,usingthepublished‘ProxNewton.Inexact.IsProperClosedConvex‘definition.Everyobjectivecomparisonincludesdomainmembership;valuesoutsideDareinterpretedasare interpreted asareinterpretedas+\infty.Thesmoothnessassumptionnamesanopenneighborhoodof. The smoothness assumption names an open neighborhood of .ThesmoothnessassumptionnamesanopenneighborhoodofD.Thedirection. The direction .Thedirectiond_H(x;\mathcal J)ischosenfromtheexactminimizers;alltheoremusesplaceis chosen from the exact minimizers; all theorem uses placeischosenfromtheexactminimizers;alltheoremusesplacexinininDandandandH$ positive definite. A CGD run records the chosen minimizers, so it does not rely on any unspecified value of that choice outside its valid inputs.

The Armijo predicate records the first successful geometric trial, including rejection of all earlier trials. The matrix bounds in Assumption 1 are quadratic-form bounds. Lemma 3 represents eigenvalue extremes by Rayleigh quotients on the selected coordinates; its generalized spectrum is that of the pair of principal submatrices. These extrema are used only with a nonempty block and positive-definite matrices. The paper's o(α)o(\alpha)o(α) is represented by a remainder whose quotient by α\alphaα tends to zero from the right. In Lemma 1 the line segment remains in DDD. A convergent subsequence is indexed by a strictly increasing map; a cluster point is represented separately by MapClusterPt.

No convergence of the entire iterate sequence is assumed. Stationarity requires the nonnegative directional derivative in every direction, not only the coordinates selected at one step. A valid development needs convex analysis of the subproblem, estimates for positive-definite quadratic forms, properties of lower semicontinuity and directional derivatives, and finite-dimensional subsequence arguments. Contributions proving those reusable facts and the named milestones are within scope.

Selected references

  • Paul Tseng and Sangwoon Yun, A coordinate gradient descent method for nonsmooth separable minimization, Mathematical Programming, Series B 117 (2009), 387–423. DOI: 10.1007/s10107-007-0170-0.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Primal-dual subgradient methods for convex problems 2: Stochastic Simple Averages Reach E[φ(x̄ₖ)] − φ* ≤ β̂ₖ₊₁(γd(x*) + L²/(2σγ))/(k+1)Research Paper

Motivation

Many decision problems under uncertainty take the form of minimizing an expected cost φ(x)=Eξf(x,ξ)\varphi(x) = \mathbb E_\xi f(x, \xi)φ(x)=Eξ​f(x,ξ) over a convex feasible set, where ξ\xiξ is a random parameter whose distribution can be sampled but not integrated in closed form. Evaluating φ\varphiφ even approximately can cost exponentially many evaluations of fff in the dimension of ξ\xiξ, so the classical deterministic notion of an approximate solution is unusable. A practical alternative, going back to Nemirovski and Yudin, asks for a random output xxx whose expected objective value is close to the optimum: E φ(x)−φ∗≤ϵ\mathbb E\,\varphi(x) - \varphi^* \le \epsilonEφ(x)−φ∗≤ϵ. Stochastic subgradient methods achieve this; Nesterov's paper Primal-dual subgradient methods for convex problems (Math. Program. 120 (2009)) shows that the same guarantee holds for a stochastic version of his method of simple dual averages, a scheme that aggregates all past subgradients in the dual space instead of taking projected steps with decreasing step sizes.

Dual averaging has since become a standard tool in stochastic and online convex optimization (regularized dual averaging, AdaGrad's primal-dual variant, distributed dual averaging). Section 6 of Nesterov's paper is the original statement of its expected-accuracy guarantee.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ and dual space E∗E^*E∗ with dual norm ∥s∥∗=max⁡{⟨s,x⟩:∥x∥≤1}\|s\|_* = \max\{\langle s, x\rangle : \|x\| \le 1\}∥s∥∗​=max{⟨s,x⟩:∥x∥≤1}. Let Q⊆EQ \subseteq EQ⊆E be closed and convex, and let ddd be a prox-function of QQQ: continuous on QQQ and strongly convex on QQQ with convexity parameter σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0,

d(αx+(1−α)y)≤αd(x)+(1−α)d(y)−12σα(1−α)∥x−y∥2,d(\alpha x + (1-\alpha)y) \le \alpha d(x) + (1-\alpha) d(y) - \tfrac12\sigma\alpha(1-\alpha)\|x-y\|^2,d(αx+(1−α)y)≤αd(x)+(1−α)d(y)−21​σα(1−α)∥x−y∥2,

with prox-center x0=arg⁡min⁡x∈Qd(x)x_0 = \arg\min_{x\in Q} d(x)x0​=argminx∈Q​d(x) and d(x0)=0d(x_0) = 0d(x0​)=0. For β>0\beta > 0β>0 and s∈E∗s \in E^*s∈E∗ the point πβ(s)=arg⁡min⁡x∈Q{−⟨s,x⟩+βd(x)}\pi_\beta(s) = \arg\min_{x \in Q}\{-\langle s, x\rangle + \beta d(x)\}πβ​(s)=argminx∈Q​{−⟨s,x⟩+βd(x)} is well defined. The scalar sequence β^\hat\betaβ^​ is given by β^0=β^1=1\hat\beta_0 = \hat\beta_1 = 1β^​0​=β^​1​=1 and β^i+1=β^i+1/β^i\hat\beta_{i+1} = \hat\beta_i + 1/\hat\beta_iβ^​i+1​=β^​i​+1/β^​i​ for i≥1i \ge 1i≥1.

The stochastic problem is given by a probability space (Ξ,μ)(\Xi, \mu)(Ξ,μ) and a cost f:Q×Ξ→Rf : Q \times \Xi \to \mathbb Rf:Q×Ξ→R with φ(x)=Eξf(x,ξ)\varphi(x) = \mathbb E_\xi f(x,\xi)φ(x)=Eξ​f(x,ξ) well defined on QQQ, and a minimizer x∗x^*x∗ of φ\varphiφ over QQQ with φ∗=φ(x∗)\varphi^* = \varphi(x^*)φ∗=φ(x∗). Assumption 1: each f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot, \xi)f(⋅,ξ) is convex on QQQ. Assumption 2: a stochastic oracle returns a subgradient f′(x,ξ)f'(x, \xi)f′(x,ξ) of f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot, \xi)f(⋅,ξ) at xxx, and ∥f′(x,ξ)∥∗≤L\|f'(x,\xi)\|_* \le L∥f′(x,ξ)∥∗​≤L for all x∈Qx \in Qx∈Q, ξ∈Ξ\xi \in \Xiξ∈Ξ.

The method of stochastic simple averages (SSA, (6.3)) fixes γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0, starts from x0x_0x0​ and s0=0s_0 = 0s0​=0, and for k≥0k \ge 0k≥0 draws a fresh independent sample ξk∼μ\xi_k \sim \muξk​∼μ and sets

sk+1=sk+f′(xk,ξk),xk+1=πγβ^k+1(−sk+1).s_{k+1} = s_k + f'(x_k, \xi_k), \qquad x_{k+1} = \pi_{\gamma\hat\beta_{k+1}}(-s_{k+1}).sk+1​=sk​+f′(xk​,ξk​),xk+1​=πγβ^​k+1​​(−sk+1​).

Its deterministic counterpart, the method of simple dual averages (SDA, (2.21)), is the same recursion with arbitrary answers gkg_kgk​ in place of f′(xk,ξk)f'(x_k, \xi_k)f′(xk​,ξk​). The quality of the points x0,…,xkx_0,\dots,x_kx0​,…,xk​ is measured by the gap δk(D)=max⁡{∑i=0k⟨gi,xi−x⟩:x∈Q, d(x)≤D}\delta_k(D) = \max\{\sum_{i=0}^k\langle g_i, x_i - x\rangle : x \in Q,\ d(x)\le D\}δk​(D)=max{∑i=0k​⟨gi​,xi​−x⟩:x∈Q, d(x)≤D}. Write ξk=(ξ0,…,ξk)\boldsymbol\xi_k = (\xi_0, \dots, \xi_k)ξk​=(ξ0​,…,ξk​) and Eξk\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k}Eξk​​ for the expectation over these k+1k+1k+1 independent samples.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7 (p. 27)

For every k≥0k \ge 0k≥0,

Eξk(φ(1k+1∑i=0kxi))−φ∗≤β^k+1k+1(γ d(x∗)+L22σγ).\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k}\Big(\varphi\Big(\frac{1}{k+1}\sum_{i=0}^k x_i\Big)\Big) - \varphi^* \le \frac{\hat\beta_{k+1}}{k+1}\Big(\gamma\, d(x^*) + \frac{L^2}{2\sigma\gamma}\Big).Eξk​​(φ(k+11​i=0∑k​xi​))−φ∗≤k+1β^​k+1​​(γd(x∗)+2σγL2​).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2 (p. 11): for SDA with any answers gig_igi​ and Lk=max⁡i≤k∥gi∥∗L_k = \max_{i\le k}\|g_i\|_*Lk​=maxi≤k​∥gi​∥∗​, δk(D)≤β^k+1(γD+Lk2/(2σγ))\delta_k(D) \le \hat\beta_{k+1}(\gamma D + L_k^2/(2\sigma\gamma))δk​(D)≤β^​k+1​(γD+Lk2​/(2σγ)) for D≥0D \ge 0D≥0, and, if some x∗∈Qx^* \in Qx∗∈Q satisfies ⟨gi,xi−x∗⟩≥0\langle g_i, x_i - x^*\rangle \ge 0⟨gi​,xi​−x∗⟩≥0 for all iii, ∥xk−x∗∥2≤2σd(x∗)+Lk2/(σ2γ2)\|x_k - x^*\|^2 \le \frac2\sigma d(x^*) + L_k^2/(\sigma^2\gamma^2)∥xk​−x∗∥2≤σ2​d(x∗)+Lk2​/(σ2γ2).
  2. (6.5) (p. 26): along every sample path, 1k+1δ~k(D)≤β^k+1k+1(γD+L22σγ)\frac{1}{k+1}\tilde\delta_k(D) \le \frac{\hat\beta_{k+1}}{k+1}(\gamma D + \frac{L^2}{2\sigma\gamma})k+11​δ~k​(D)≤k+1β^​k+1​​(γD+2σγL2​).
  3. Display after (6.5) (p. 26): for D≥d(x∗)D \ge d(x^*)D≥d(x∗), the gap of a run dominates 1k+1∑i⟨f′(xi,ξi),xi−x∗⟩\frac1{k+1}\sum_i\langle f'(x_i,\xi_i), x_i - x^*\ranglek+11​∑i​⟨f′(xi​,ξi​),xi​−x∗⟩, which dominates 1k+1∑i[f(xi,ξi)−f(x∗,ξi)]\frac1{k+1}\sum_i[f(x_i,\xi_i) - f(x^*,\xi_i)]k+11​∑i​[f(xi​,ξi​)−f(x∗,ξi​)].
  4. (6.6) (p. 26): Eξk(1k+1δk(D))≥1k+1∑iEξkf(xi,ξi)−φ∗\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k}(\frac1{k+1}\delta_k(D)) \ge \frac1{k+1}\sum_i\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k} f(x_i,\xi_i) - \varphi^*Eξk​​(k+11​δk​(D))≥k+11​∑i​Eξk​​f(xi​,ξi​)−φ∗.
  5. p. 27, first display: Eξkf(xi,ξi)=Eξkφ(xi)\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k} f(x_i,\xi_i) = \mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k}\varphi(x_i)Eξk​​f(xi​,ξi​)=Eξk​​φ(xi​) for i≤ki \le ki≤k.
  6. p. 27, display before Theorem 7: 1k+1∑iEφ(xi)≥Eφ(1k+1∑ixi)\frac1{k+1}\sum_i\mathbb E\varphi(x_i) \ge \mathbb E\varphi(\frac1{k+1}\sum_i x_i)k+11​∑i​Eφ(xi​)≥Eφ(k+11​∑i​xi​), together with the averaged identity.

Significance

Theorem 7 gives an explicit, non-asymptotic bound on the expected optimality gap of the averaged SSA point. Since β^k+1≈2k\hat\beta_{k+1} \approx \sqrt{2k}β^​k+1​≈2k​, the bound is O(1/k)O(1/\sqrt k)O(1/k​), the optimal rate for nonsmooth stochastic convex optimization with bounded subgradients. Two features distinguish it from the classical stochastic subgradient bound: it holds in an arbitrary norm with a non-Euclidean prox-function (for example the entropy on the simplex with the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ norm), and the feasible set QQQ need not be bounded, since only d(x∗)d(x^*)d(x∗) enters. The constant is explicit and γ\gammaγ can be tuned to γ=L/2σd(x∗)\gamma = L/\sqrt{2\sigma d(x^*)}γ=L/2σd(x∗)​.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge no machine-checked proof of Theorem 7 or of the dual averaging bounds of the paper exists. A formalization yields a reusable verified analysis of dual averaging in a general normed space, a template for expectation bounds over i.i.d. sample paths of an adaptive algorithm, and checked constants.

Difficulty

The pathwise part is a consequence of the deterministic Theorem 2, which itself rests on the general Dual Averaging bound (the companion mission's Theorem 1) and on the strong convexity estimates for πβ\pi_\betaπβ​. The probabilistic part looks routine on paper but is where formal arguments break: the iterate xix_ixi​ is a function of ξ0,…,ξi−1\xi_0, \dots, \xi_{i-1}ξ0​,…,ξi−1​, and the identity Ef(xi,ξi)=Eφ(xi)\mathbb E f(x_i, \xi_i) = \mathbb E\varphi(x_i)Ef(xi​,ξi​)=Eφ(xi​) requires measurability of the whole run and a Fubini argument on the product space. Measurability of the run in turn depends on continuity of the argmin map πβ\pi_\betaπβ​, and integrability of φ(xˉk)\varphi(\bar x_k)φ(xˉk​) and of the gap is not assumed but must be derived from the uniform bound LLL and the boundedness of the iterates. Pathwise bounds alone do not suffice: (6.5) controls the gap on each sample, not φ(xˉk)\varphi(\bar x_k)φ(xˉk​).

Formalization scope

Theorem numbers and page numbers refer to source.pdf, the author's revised CORE discussion-paper version (September 2005) of the Math. Program. article; printed pages equal PDF pages.

  • EEE is a finite-dimensional real normed space with an arbitrary norm; E∗E^*E∗ is StrongDual ℝ E with the operator norm, and ⟨s,x⟩\langle s, x\rangle⟨s,x⟩ is s x. Strong convexity is Mathlib's StrongConvexOn Q σ d, which is exactly (1.8); σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0.
  • π\piπ is a map ℝ → StrongDual ℝ E → E with the hypothesis that πβ(s)\pi_\beta(s)πβ​(s) lies in QQQ and minimizes −⟨s,x⟩+βd(x)-\langle s, x\rangle + \beta d(x)−⟨s,x⟩+βd(x) for every β>0\beta > 0β>0; no choice function is used.
  • β^\hat\betaβ^​ is defined by recursion with β^0=β^1=1\hat\beta_0 = \hat\beta_1 = 1β^​0​=β^​1​=1. The gap is a real supremum over FD={x∈Q:d(x)≤D}\mathcal F_D = \{x\in Q : d(x)\le D\}FD​={x∈Q:d(x)≤D}, used only for D≥0D \ge 0D≥0, where the set is nonempty and bounded.
  • Indices start at 0; x0x_0x0​ is the prox-center. The run is a function of a sample path ω:N→Ξ\omega : \mathbb N \to \Xiω:N→Ξ; Eξk\mathbb E_{\boldsymbol\xi_k}Eξk​​ is the integral against the product measure μ⊗(k+1)\mu^{\otimes(k+1)}μ⊗(k+1) on Ξk+1\Xi^{k+1}Ξk+1 (the law of k+1k+1k+1 i.i.d. copies of ξ\xiξ), with the finite sample padded to a sequence that the iterates never read.
  • fff and f′f'f′ are functions on E×ΞE \times \XiE×Ξ whose values off QQQ are irrelevant; the subgradient inequality is relative to QQQ. Integrability of f(x,⋅)f(x, \cdot)f(x,⋅) for x∈Qx \in Qx∈Q, and joint measurability of fff and f′f'f′, are explicit hypotheses. The paper uses measurability tacitly; without it a Lean integral of a non-measurable function is 000 and the goal could become false.
  • A statement for a fixed sample path, or with Eφ(xˉk)\mathbb E\varphi(\bar x_k)Eφ(xˉk​) replaced by a pathwise quantity, is a different and weaker theorem and does not count. Integrability of the run is not assumed: it is part of what must be proved.

A complete development needs the deterministic dual averaging analysis (Lemma 1, Lemma 2, Theorem 1 of the paper, restated here only through Theorem 2), measurability and continuity of πβ\pi_\betaπβ​, and Fubini on finite products of probability spaces. The dual averaging lemmas and the product-measure lemmas for adaptive sample paths are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and supporting lemmas on measurability of the SSA run, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, Primal-dual subgradient methods for convex problems, Mathematical Programming 120 (2009), 221–259. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-007-0149-x
  • A. Nemirovski, A. Juditsky, G. Lan, A. Shapiro, Robust stochastic approximation approach to stochastic programming, SIAM J. Optim. 19 (2009), 1574–1609. https://doi.org/10.1137/070704277
  • L. Xiao, Dual averaging methods for regularized stochastic learning and online optimization, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 11 (2010), 2543–2596. https://jmlr.org/papers/v11/xiao10a.html
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2: With a Bounded Second-Stage Set the Intrinsic First-Stage Problem Coincides with the One Induced by P and Recourse Is AttainedResearch Paper

Motivation

Two-stage stochastic programming with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision x1x_1x1​ is fixed before a random outcome sss is observed, and a recourse decision x2(s)x_2(s)x2​(s) is taken afterwards, once sss is known. The model goes back to Dantzig (1955) and Beale (1955) and is the basic template of stochastic optimization in operations research: capacity planning before demand is known, production before prices are revealed, reservoir management before inflows are observed.

When the outcome space is not finite, the recourse is a function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), and the problem must specify the class of functions it ranges over. Rockafellar and Wets (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976) 173–195) develop the duality theory of the convex case with recourse functions that are measurable and essentially bounded (L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞), the setting in which the dual multipliers and their interpretation as prices become available. Their §3 asks whether that restriction loses anything: whether minimizing over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ recourses gives the same first-stage problem as minimizing, scenario by scenario, the best attainable second-stage cost.

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. The data are closed convex nonempty sets C1⊆Rn1C_1\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_1}C1​⊆Rn1​, C2⊆Rn2C_2\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_2}C2​⊆Rn2​, finite convex functions f10,f1if_{10},f_{1i}f10​,f1i​ on Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​ (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), and functions f20(s,x1,x2)f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)f20​(s,x1​,x2​), f2i(s,x1,x2)f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), finite and jointly convex in (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) for each sss, and measurable in sss for each (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​), summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1. These are the paper's standing assumptions.

With X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​, the essential objective of the problem P\mathbf PP is

f(x1,x2)=F1(x1,0)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),0) σ(ds),f(x_1,x_2)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S F_2\big(s,x_1,x_2(s),0\big)\,\sigma(ds),f(x1​,x2​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),0)σ(ds),

where F1(x1,u1)=f10(x1)F_1(x_1,u_1)=f_{10}(x_1)F1​(x1​,u1​)=f10​(x1​) if x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤u1if_{1i}(x_1)\le u_{1i}f1i​(x1​)≤u1i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise, and F2(s,x1,x2,u2)=f20(s,x1,x2)F_2(s,x_1,x_2,u_2)=f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)F2​(s,x1​,x2​,u2​)=f20​(s,x1​,x2​) if x2∈C2x_2\in C_2x2​∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2)≤u2if_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)\le u_{2i}f2i​(s,x1​,x2​)≤u2i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. Integrals of extended-real functions follow the paper's convention (2.4): the ordinary integral (real or −∞-\infty−∞) when the integrand is majorized by a summable function, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

Two first-stage problems are compared:

  • the first-stage problem induced by P\mathbf PP minimizes J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2)J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2)J(x1​)=infx2​∈Ln2​∞​​f(x1​,x2​);
  • the intrinsic first-stage problem Q\mathbf QQ minimizes j(x1)=F1(x1,0)+∫Sq(s,x1) σ(ds)j(x_1)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S q(s,x_1)\,\sigma(ds)j(x1​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​q(s,x1​)σ(ds), where q(s,x1)=inf⁡x2∈Rn2F2(s,x1,x2,0)q(s,x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathbb R^{n_2}}F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)q(s,x1​)=infx2​∈Rn2​​F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0) is the optimal recourse cost in scenario sss.

The hypothesis of the general result uses ρ(s,x1)=inf⁡{∣x2∣∣F2(s,x1,x2,0)<+∞}\rho(s,x_1)=\inf\{|x_2|\mid F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)<+\infty\}ρ(s,x1​)=inf{∣x2​∣∣F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0)<+∞}, the Euclidean distance from the origin to the feasible recourses (+∞+\infty+∞ if there are none), and calls x1x_1x1​ intrinsically feasible when j(x1)<+∞j(x_1)<+\inftyj(x1​)<+∞. A normal convex integrand hhh on S×RnS\times\mathbb R^nS×Rn is lower semicontinuous, convex and proper in zzz for each sss, with a measurability condition given by a sequence of measurable functions dense in each dom⁡h(s,⋅)\operatorname{dom}h(s,\cdot)domh(s,⋅).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 187)

If C2C_2C2​ is bounded, then for every x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​

j(x1)=J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2),inf⁡Q=inf⁡P,j(x_1)=J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2),\qquad \inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf P,j(x1​)=J(x1​)=x2​∈Ln2​∞​inf​f(x1​,x2​),infQ=infP,

the two first-stage problems have the same minimizers, and the infimum over x2∈Ln2∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}x2​∈Ln2​∞​ is attained for each x1x_1x1​.

Theorem 1 (p. 186)

If ρ(⋅,x1)\rho(\cdot,x_1)ρ(⋅,x1​) is essentially bounded for every intrinsically feasible x1x_1x1​, then j(x1)=J(x1)j(x_1)=J(x_1)j(x1​)=J(x1​) for all x1x_1x1​, inf⁡Q=inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf PinfQ=infP, and the minimizers coincide. Boundedness of C2C_2C2​ is a special case of this hypothesis.

Milestones

  • (2.1): F(x,u)=F1(x1,u1)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),u2(s)) σ(ds)F(x,u)=F_1(x_1,u_1)+\int_S F_2(s,x_1,x_2(s),u_2(s))\,\sigma(ds)F(x,u)=F1​(x1​,u1​)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),u2​(s))σ(ds) (p. 180);
  • Proposition 1: for a normal convex integrand, inf⁡z∈Lnp∫Sh(s,z(s)) σ(ds)=∫Sinf⁡zh(s,z) σ(ds)\inf_{z\in\mathcal L^p_n}\int_S h(s,z(s))\,\sigma(ds)=\int_S\inf_z h(s,z)\,\sigma(ds)infz∈Lnp​​∫S​h(s,z(s))σ(ds)=∫S​infz​h(s,z)σ(ds) whenever the left side is not +∞+\infty+∞ (p. 181);
  • Proposition 2: F2F_2F2​ is a normal convex integrand (p. 182);
  • Proposition 4: q(⋅,x1)q(\cdot,x_1)q(⋅,x1​) is measurable (p. 185);
  • (3.5)–(3.6): j≤fj\le fj≤f, hence inf⁡Q≤inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q\le\inf\mathbf PinfQ≤infP (p. 186);
  • the feasible-recourse multifunction (3.10) is measurable, ρ\rhoρ is measurable, and the nearest feasible point is a measurable selection (p. 187);
  • Theorem 1 (p. 186);
  • with C2C_2C2​ bounded, the argmin multifunction of F2(s,x1,⋅,0)F_2(s,x_1,\cdot,0)F2​(s,x1​,⋅,0) is nonempty, compact, measurable and has a measurable selection (p. 188).

The Corollary of Theorem 2 (p. 188), that x1x_1x1​ minimizes Q\mathbf QQ iff some (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) minimizes P\mathbf PP, is included as a further statement.

Significance

The theorem justifies the modelling choice behind the paper's duality theory: when the second-stage constraint set is bounded, restricting recourse to essentially bounded measurable functions changes neither the optimal value nor the optimal first-stage decisions, and an optimal recourse function exists for every first stage. The duality theory of the companion mission (Theorem 3 of the same paper) is developed in that L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ setting, so the two results together describe the problem completely in the bounded case. Proposition 1, the interchange of infimum and integral for normal integrands, is a basic tool of stochastic programming and of the calculus of variations, used well beyond this paper.

The results are proved in the 1976 paper, relying on Rockafellar's earlier work on normal integrands and measurable selections. None of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the Lebesgue and Bochner integrals, Lp\mathcal L^pLp spaces and the measurable-selection prerequisites in partial form; it has no normal integrands, no extended-real integral convention of this kind, and no interchange theorem. A formal development produces those as reusable components.

Difficulty

The inequality j≤Jj\le Jj≤J is immediate. The reverse inequality requires, from the pointwise infima q(s,x1)q(s,x_1)q(s,x1​), a single recourse function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅) that is measurable, essentially bounded and nearly optimal in almost every scenario. Choosing a near-minimizer separately for each sss gives no measurability at all: the content is a measurable choice, and that needs the normality of F2F_2F2​ and the measurability of the multifunctions of feasible and of optimal recourses. Essential boundedness is a second, independent obstacle: without a bound on ρ\rhoρ every feasible recourse may be unbounded, and the infimum over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ can then exceed jjj. Attainment in Theorem 2 needs, in addition, compactness of the argmin sets, which comes from the boundedness of C2C_2C2​ and lower semicontinuity.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ; indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m; Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Lnp\mathcal L^p_nLnp​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) p σ, so recourse functions are almost-everywhere classes and the second-stage constraints hold almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure in every theorem. All extended-real quantities (FFF, F1F_1F1​, F2F_2F2​, fff, JJJ, qqq, jjj, ρ\rhoρ, inf⁡P\inf\mathbf PinfP, inf⁡Q\inf\mathbf QinfQ) take values in EReal, and every infimum is the complete-lattice infimum, so an empty infimum is +∞+\infty+∞. The integral convention (2.4) is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.expect: +∞+\infty+∞ when the positive part has infinite integral (for a measurable function, exactly when it has no summable majorant), and otherwise the difference of the lower Lebesgue integrals of the positive and negative parts. ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ in ρ\rhoρ is the Euclidean length, not the sup norm. "Gives the minimum" is "has value ≤\le≤ the value at every point". Measurability of a multifunction is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.IsMeasurableMultifunction ({s∣Γ(s)∩K≠∅}\{s\mid\Gamma(s)\cap K\ne\emptyset\}{s∣Γ(s)∩K=∅} measurable for every closed KKK). The standing assumptions are fields of the structure Problem.

The integral of an extended-real function must not be replaced by a Bochner integral of its real part, which would turn ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values into 000 and make jjj meaningless; and the infima must not be real sInf, which returns 000 on unbounded sets.

Reusable beyond this mission: the notion of a normal convex integrand on a finite-dimensional space, and Proposition 1. Contributions of measurable-selection infrastructure (Kuratowski–Ryll-Nardzewski type theorems, measurability of distance functions of closed-valued multifunctions) are welcome as supporting lemmas. The mission "Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1" formalizes the duality theorem of the same paper on the same model.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Measurable dependence of convex sets and functions on parameters, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 28 (1969) 4–25. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(69)90104-8
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear programming under uncertainty, Management Science 1(3–4) (1955) 197–206. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1.3-4.197
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Duality in Constrained Portfolio Optimization II: The Dual Problem Attains Its Infimum, So an Optimal Constrained Portfolio–Consumption Pair Exists for Every Initial CapitalResearch Paper

Motivation

Portfolio decisions in continuous time must respect both market uncertainty and investment restrictions. A ban on short sales, for example, restricts the vector of wealth fractions a trader may hold at every instant. The corresponding optimal consumption and investment problem is harder than its unrestricted counterpart because a candidate portfolio obtained from the usual pricing equations may violate the constraint. Cvitanić and Karatzas introduced auxiliary markets indexed by a process and used a dual optimization problem to establish existence of an optimal constrained policy in their 1992 paper. This mission formalizes the paper's existence theorem, Theorem 13.1, together with the results in Sections 12–13 that specify its dual target.

Setting

Fix a finite horizon T>0T>0T>0 and a complete probability space carrying a standard ddd-dimensional Brownian motion WWW. Information at time ttt is the probability augmentation of the filtration generated by WWW up to ttt. A bond earns short rate rtr_trt​; ddd stocks have appreciation vector btb_tbt​ and volatility matrix σt\sigma_tσt​. The market assumptions require progressively measurable coefficients, a uniform lower bound on rrr, uniform nondegeneracy of σσT\sigma\sigma^{\mathsf T}σσT, finite expected interest-rate integral, and finite energy of the market price of risk θ=σ−1(b−r1)\theta=\sigma^{-1}(b-r\mathbf1)θ=σ−1(b−r1) §2.

A portfolio πt\pi_tπt​ specifies fractions of wealth held in the stocks, while ct≥0c_t\geq0ct​≥0 is consumption and XtX_tXt​ is wealth. The feasible portfolios lie in a fixed nonempty closed convex set K⊆RdK\subseteq\mathbb R^dK⊆Rd. Its support function is δK(v)=sup⁡π∈K(−π⋅v)\delta_K(v)=\sup_{\pi\in K}(-\pi\cdot v)δK​(v)=supπ∈K​(−π⋅v), which may equal +∞+\infty+∞. The process ν\nuν indexing an auxiliary market belongs to D\mathcal DD when it has finite expected quadratic energy and finite expected integrated support value. Its deflator HνH_\nuHν​ combines an interest-rate discount with a Brownian exponential. The class D′\mathcal D'D′ consists of those ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D for which the budget map Xν(y)\mathcal X_\nu(y)Xν​(y) is finite for every y>0y>0y>0 §§4, 8.

The running utility U1(t,c)U_1(t,c)U1​(t,c) and terminal utility U2(XT)U_2(X_T)U2​(XT​) are strictly increasing and strictly concave for positive arguments. An admissible constrained policy has nonnegative wealth, finite expected negative utility, and πt∈K\pi_t\in Kπt​∈K for Lebesgue-time times probability almost every (t,ω)(t,\omega)(t,ω). The primal value V(x)V(x)V(x) is the supremum of its expected utility over all such policies with initial capital x>0x>0x>0. The dual value V~(y)\widetilde V(y)V(y) is the infimum, over ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D, of expected conjugate utility evaluated at yHνyH_\nuyHν​ §§5–6, 12.

Formalization targets

Dual attainment

The first conclusion of Theorem 13.1 is the paper's condition (12.9):

∀y>0∃λy∈D′V~(y)=J~(y;λy).\forall y>0\quad\exists\lambda_y\in\mathcal D'\quad\widetilde V(y)=\widetilde J(y;\lambda_y).∀y>0∃λy​∈D′V(y)=J(y;λy​).

Thus the infimum is attained by a drift with a finite budget map. It is a conclusion of this mission, even though earlier Section 12 results assume it. The milestones include weak duality (12.8), the dual representation of Proposition 12.1, the capital-matching result of Proposition 12.2, and the analytic properties of the extended dual functional in Proposition 13.2 pp. 792–795.

An optimal constrained policy for every capital

The theorem's second conclusion is

∀x>0∃(π^,c^,X^)∈A′(x)∀(π,c,X)∈A′(x),J(π,c,X)≤J(π^,c^,X^).\forall x>0\quad\exists (\widehat\pi,\widehat c,\widehat X)\in\mathcal A'(x)\quad\forall(\pi,c,X)\in\mathcal A'(x),\quad J(\pi,c,X)\leq J(\widehat\pi,\widehat c,\widehat X).∀x>0∃(π,c,X)∈A′(x)∀(π,c,X)∈A′(x),J(π,c,X)≤J(π,c,X).

Here A′(x)\mathcal A'(x)A′(x) is the constrained admissible class. Theorem 12.4 establishes this conclusion when dual attainment is assumed; Theorem 13.1 provides that assumption under the paper's stated utility and dual-finiteness conditions p. 794.

Significance

The result supplies an optimizer, rather than only a bound on the best attainable utility. It also identifies a minimizing auxiliary market for every positive dual parameter, making the dual description usable at a specified initial capital. The dual representation links the primal value to a convex function that can be studied without choosing a constrained policy first §§12–13.

The theorem is proved in the paper; the remaining work here is a machine-checked development of its definitions, hypotheses, and existence argument. The mission also produces reusable definitions of an almost-surely square-integrable Brownian integral relation, extended-real utility expectations, an extended support function, and constrained wealth classes. The Brownian state space and predictable step-sum substrate credit the published Ethier–Kurtz formalizations. The paper refers some analytic steps to earlier works instead of reproducing full proofs, including Lemma 12.3 and a final finiteness argument pp. 793–796.

Difficulty

Weak duality alone only bounds the constrained value from above. It does not supply a minimizer of J~(y;ν)\widetilde J(y;\nu)J(y;ν), and an arbitrary minimizing auxiliary process need not belong to D′\mathcal D'D′. The dual functional must retain meaningful infinite values on the full finite-energy process space H\mathcal HH; replacing them with total-operation defaults can turn the needed coercivity and lower-semicontinuity statements into different claims. Even after dual attainment, the minimizing parameter for a prescribed capital must match the budget map Xλy(y)\mathcal X_{\lambda_y}(y)Xλy​​(y) §§12–13. These are the precise gaps between a numerical bound and the asserted optimal policy.

Formalization scope

Lean uses Rd\mathbb R^dRd with its Euclidean norm, a finite positive horizon, a complete probability measure, and the augmented Brownian filtration. Processes are functions of time and sample point; ℓ⊗P\ell\otimes Pℓ⊗P almost-everywhere restrictions on portfolios and auxiliary drifts are distinct from pathwise PPP-almost-sure statements. A policy is represented by a triple (π,c,X)(\pi,c,X)(π,c,X) whose wealth process satisfies the integral equation, matching the paper's pair together with its unique wealth solution. The integral operator is bound to the local Itô construction by predictable step approximations; it is not a free function. Integrands must be in its almost-sure square-integrable domain.

Support values, utility at zero, expected utility, and value functions use extended reals. The extension U(0)U(0)U(0) is the right limit U(0+)U(0+)U(0+); an extended-real supremum defines conjugate utility where zero arguments arise. The inverse marginal is a positive-argument inverse of U′U'U′. The minimization in V~\widetilde VV ranges over D\mathcal DD, while (12.9) asks for a minimizer in D′\mathcal D'D′. Its witnesses λy\lambda_yλy​ remain explicit choices in statements involving Xλy\mathcal X_{\lambda_y}Xλy​​; no default-valued inverse Yν\mathcal Y_\nuYν​ is introduced. The functional J~y\widetilde J_yJy​ of (13.3) is defined on H\mathcal HH, uses the paper's formula on G\mathcal GG, and is +∞+\infty+∞ off G\mathcal GG. On D\mathcal DD it agrees almost everywhere with the original dual objective, an equality requiring a formal lemma. Assumption 6.2 and conditions (5.8), (8.25), (12.2), (12.3), and (12.11) are explicit. Their quantifiers cover both utilities and every time in [0,T][0,T][0,T] where stated. The mission rules out a vacuous dual-attainment hypothesis, a zero default for an unbounded support supremum, and an unconstrained stochastic-integral operator. Contributions proving the source milestones and the analytic lemmas they need are in scope.

Selected references

  • Jakša Cvitanić and Ioannis Karatzas, Convex Duality in Constrained Portfolio Optimization, The Annals of Applied Probability 2(4), 1992, 767–818. DOI: 10.1214/aoap/1177005576.
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 2: A Game with Side Payments Has a Nonempty Core Iff It Is Balanced, and Then Its Core Is the Core of Its Concave Fuzzy ExtensionResearch Paper

Why cores of games with side payments

A cooperative game with side payments assigns to each coalition of players the total payoff it can secure on its own and share freely among its members. The core is the set of ways of dividing the payoff of the grand coalition that no coalition can improve upon. It is the basic stability notion of cooperative game theory and of its applications in operations research: cost allocation for shared facilities, network design, inventory pooling and linear production games all ask whether a core allocation exists and what it looks like.

The core can be empty, and the question of when it is not was answered independently by Bondareva (1963) and Shapley (1967): the core is nonempty exactly when the game is balanced, a linear-programming condition on weighted families of coalitions. Scarf (1967) extended the existence half to games without side payments, and Billera (1970) recast balancedness for those games.

Aubin's Cooperative Fuzzy Games (Math. Oper. Res. 6(1), 1981) reads these results through fuzzy coalitions, in which each player participates at a rate between 0 and 1. In §6 every game on a family of coalitions is extended to a concave positively homogeneous function of fuzzy coalitions, and the Bondareva–Shapley theorem becomes a statement about that extension. This mission formalizes §2 and §6 of the paper: the core of a fuzzy game with side payments, its superdifferential description, and Proposition 6.1.

Setting

Let N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n} be the set of players. A coalition A⊆NA\subseteq NA⊆N is identified with its characteristic vector τA∈{0,1}n\tau^A\in\{0,1\}^nτA∈{0,1}n, and τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N=(1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1). A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n, where τi\tau_iτi​ is the rate at which player iii participates.

A fuzzy game with side payments is a worth function vvv with v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0 that is positively homogeneous, v(tτ)=t v(τ)v(t\tau)=t\,v(\tau)v(tτ)=tv(τ) for t>0t>0t>0. Homogeneity extends vvv from [0,1]n[0,1]^n[0,1]n to the orthant R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​. Its core is

core⁡(v)={c∈Rn: ∑i∈Nci=v(τN),  ∑i∈Nτici≥v(τ) for all τ∈[0,1]n},\operatorname{core}(v)=\Big\{c\in\mathbb R^n:\ \sum_{i\in N}c_i=v(\tau^N),\ \ \sum_{i\in N}\tau_ic_i\ge v(\tau)\ \text{for all }\tau\in[0,1]^n\Big\},core(v)={c∈Rn: i∈N∑​ci​=v(τN),  i∈N∑​τi​ci​≥v(τ) for all τ∈[0,1]n},

the allocations that no fuzzy coalition blocks. The superdifferential of vvv at τ\tauτ is ∂v(τ)={c: v(τ)−v(σ)≥∑ici(τi−σi) for all σ∈R+n}\partial v(\tau)=\{c:\ v(\tau)-v(\sigma)\ge\sum_i c_i(\tau_i-\sigma_i)\ \text{for all }\sigma\in\mathbb R^n_+\}∂v(τ)={c: v(τ)−v(σ)≥∑i​ci​(τi​−σi​) for all σ∈R+n​}.

A usual game with side payments is given by a family C\mathscr CC of nonempty coalitions that contains NNN and every singleton {i}\{i\}{i}, and by a worth v(A)∈Rv(A)\in\mathbb Rv(A)∈R for each A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C. Its core is the set of c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn with ∑i∈Nci=v(N)\sum_{i\in N}c_i=v(N)∑i∈N​ci​=v(N) and ∑i∈Aci≥v(A)\sum_{i\in A}c_i\ge v(A)∑i∈A​ci​≥v(A) for every A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C. For τ∈R+n\tau\in\mathbb R^n_+τ∈R+n​, C(τ)\mathscr C(\tau)C(τ) is the set of nonnegative weights m(A)m(A)m(A), A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C, with ∑A∋im(A)=τi\sum_{A\ni i}m(A)=\tau_i∑A∋i​m(A)=τi​ for each player iii, and

πv(τ)=sup⁡m∈C(τ) ∑A∈Cm(A) v(A).\pi v(\tau)=\sup_{m\in\mathscr C(\tau)}\ \sum_{A\in\mathscr C}m(A)\,v(A).πv(τ)=m∈C(τ)sup​ A∈C∑​m(A)v(A).

The game is balanced if πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.1

core⁡(v)≠∅  ⟺  πv(τN)=v(N),and thencore⁡(v)=core⁡(πv).\operatorname{core}(v)\neq\emptyset\iff \pi v(\tau^N)=v(N),\qquad\text{and then}\qquad \operatorname{core}(v)=\operatorname{core}(\pi v).core(v)=∅⟺πv(τN)=v(N),and thencore(v)=core(πv).

The first half is the Bondareva–Shapley theorem for an arbitrary family C\mathscr CC. The second identifies the core of the discrete game with the core of the fuzzy game πv\pi vπv.

Milestones

  1. §2 (4)–(5). For a positively homogeneous vvv with v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0, core⁡(v)=∂v(τN)\operatorname{core}(v)=\partial v(\tau^N)core(v)=∂v(τN).
  2. Remark 2.1. Such a vvv is concave on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​ if and only if it is superadditive, v(τ+σ)≥v(τ)+v(σ)v(\tau+\sigma)\ge v(\tau)+v(\sigma)v(τ+σ)≥v(τ)+v(σ).
  3. Proposition 2.1. If vvv is moreover concave, its core is convex, compact and nonempty; if vvv is differentiable at τN\tau^NτN, the core is {Dv(τN)}\{Dv(\tau^N)\}{Dv(τN)}.
  4. §6 (5). If m∈C(τ)m\in\mathscr C(\tau)m∈C(τ) and m(A)>0m(A)>0m(A)>0, then A⊆Aτ={i:τi>0}A\subseteq A_\tau=\{i:\tau_i>0\}A⊆Aτ​={i:τi​>0}.
  5. §6 (2). πv\pi vπv is the smallest concave positively homogeneous function on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​ with πv(τA)≥v(A)\pi v(\tau^A)\ge v(A)πv(τA)≥v(A) for every A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C.
  6. §6, after (6). The core of the fuzzy game πv\pi vπv is nonempty, convex and compact, whether or not vvv is balanced.

Significance

Proposition 6.1 is the standard criterion for the existence of core allocations in transferable-utility games. In operations research it is the tool behind core results for linear production games, flow games, facility location and inventory games: one exhibits a family of balancing weights, or the absence of one, and reads off whether a stable cost or profit allocation exists. Aubin's version adds that a balanced game's core is the superdifferential of a concave function, so it is described by convex analysis and, when πv\pi vπv is smooth at τN\tau^NτN, reduces to a single point given by the gradient.

The result is classical and proved in the literature. To our knowledge, no machine-checked proof of the Bondareva–Shapley theorem exists in Mathlib or on this platform: the platform has results on cores of convex (supermodular) games, which are a different hypothesis. The mission therefore produces a first formal proof of the theorem for a general family C\mathscr CC of coalitions, the superdifferential description of the fuzzy core, and the minimality of the concave extension πv\pi vπv. The definitions (fuzzy coalitions, balances, πv\pi vπv) are reusable by later missions on games without side payments and on values of fuzzy games.

Difficulty

The inclusion core⁡(v)⊆core⁡(πv)\operatorname{core}(v)\subseteq\operatorname{core}(\pi v)core(v)⊆core(πv) and the necessity of balancedness are short computations with the balancing weights. The difficulty is sufficiency: from πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N), a core allocation has to be produced. This is an existence statement for a system of linear inequalities, and it needs a duality or separation argument. Mathlib's finite-dimensional linear programming duality and separation theorems do not apply off the shelf, because πv\pi vπv is a supremum over a polytope of weights indexed by coalitions, and its attainment and finiteness must be established first. Proposition 2.1 similarly needs the existence of supergradients of a concave function at an interior point and their compactness, which are not packaged for functions defined only on an orthant.

Formalization scope

Players are Fin n; multiutilities and fuzzy coalitions are Fin n → ℝ with the coordinatewise order, and the cube is Set.Icc 0 1. The commitments are:

  • A fuzzy game is a function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn whose values off the orthant are never used; v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0 and homogeneity for every t>0t>0t>0 and τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 are hypotheses of every §2 statement, because §2 states them once for the whole section. Concavity is concavity on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​.
  • In the superdifferential (5), σ\sigmaσ ranges over R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​, the domain of the extended vvv; the paper leaves this implicit.
  • "Differentiable at τN\tau^NτN" is DifferentiableAt at the interior point (1,…,1)(1,\dots,1)(1,…,1), and Dv(τN)Dv(\tau^N)Dv(τN) is the vector of partial derivatives.
  • The family C\mathscr CC contains NNN and all singletons and excludes ∅\emptyset∅; the core and πv\pi vπv use only coalitions in C\mathscr CC, so v(∅)=0v(\emptyset)=0v(∅)=0 plays no role. Because N∈CN\in\mathscr CN∈C and ∅∉C\emptyset\notin\mathscr C∅∈/C, the family exists only for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • πv\pi vπv is a real supremum. For τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 the set of values is nonempty and bounded above, so the value is the paper's; off the orthant the set is empty and the value is never used.
  • The printed v(C)v(\mathscr C)v(C) and τC\tau^{\mathscr C}τC in §6 (2)–(3) are read as v(A)v(A)v(A) and τA\tau^AτA, as §6 (4) settles.

Balancedness is the equation πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N) with πv\pi vπv built from the balances of §6 (3)–(4); a formalization that defines "balanced" through the core, or takes πv\pi vπv to be an envelope already known to agree with the core, makes the goal empty and is ruled out. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a general Bondareva–Shapley lemma for finite families of coalitions, and supergradient existence for concave functions on convex sets with nonempty interior.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative Fuzzy Games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1), 1981, 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • O. N. Bondareva, Some applications of linear programming methods to the theory of cooperative games, Problemy Kibernetiki 10, 1963, 119–139 (in Russian; no stable online copy).
  • L. S. Shapley, On balanced sets and cores, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 14(4), 1967, 453–460. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800140404
  • H. E. Scarf, The core of an N person game, Econometrica 35(1), 1967, 50–69. https://doi.org/10.2307/1909703
  • L. J. Billera, Some theorems on the core of an n-person game without side-payments, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 18(3), 1970, 567–579. https://doi.org/10.1137/0118007
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control 1: The Marginal Conditions on the Convex Hull of Each Item's Decreasing Cost Function Determine a Unique Optimal AllocationResearch Paper

Why marginal allocation needs a convex hull

Service organizations keep repairable spare parts at a depot and at operating bases. Stock has a purchase or holding cost, while insufficient stock leaves backorders. Craig Sherbrooke's METRIC study describes how to evaluate such a system and distribute additional units among item types. Its fifth computational stage compares the reduction in expected backorders from the next unit with the cost of that unit. The comparison is delicate because the backorder function after optimizing the depot–base split can fail to be convex as a function of total item stock, even though a fixed depot-stock version is convex. Sherbrooke therefore introduces a convex extension before applying marginal analysis (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 134–135).

This mission isolates the theorem in the paper's Appendix. It concerns abstract item functions with the properties needed for the allocation rule, so the result can be studied independently of the queueing assumptions and the FORTRAN procedure that produced those functions in METRIC. The paper supplies a proof of the Appendix theorem; the mission seeks a machine-checked formalization of its precise mathematical content (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 140–141).

Setting: stock levels, costs, and the lower boundary

There is a finite collection of items indexed by iii. A decision assigns each item a stock level mi∈Nm_i\in\mathbb Nmi​∈N, where 000 is permitted. Item iii has a unit cost cic_ici​ and a real-valued function Ξi(m)\Xi_i(m)Ξi​(m) representing the backorder contribution associated with stock level mmm. In the METRIC application, Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is obtained after choosing the best allocation of mmm units between depot and bases. The Appendix theorem uses only that Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is nonincreasing and has a finite lower bound. “Decreasing” is read weakly: the paper's justification says that adding a unit “cannot exceed” the backorders at the previous level (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 136).

For a function g:N→Rg:\mathbb N\to\mathbb Rg:N→R, write Δg(m)=g(m+1)−g(m)\Delta g(m)=g(m+1)-g(m)Δg(m)=g(m+1)−g(m). The function is discretely convex when Δg(m+1)≥Δg(m)\Delta g(m+1)\ge\Delta g(m)Δg(m+1)≥Δg(m) at every level. The lower convex hull HiH_iHi​, written Ξi′\Xi_i'Ξi′​ in the paper, is the greatest discretely convex function at or below Ξi\Xi_iΞi​. It follows the lower boundary of the convex hull of the points (m,Ξi(m))(m,\Xi_i(m))(m,Ξi​(m)); a point above that boundary is lowered, while a contact point keeps its original value (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 135–136, 140). The existing ServiceParts.StockLevels.Basic definition supplies Δ\DeltaΔ and Δ2\Delta^2Δ2 for real stock-level functions; this mission reuses it.

The original objective is the separable sum

J(m)=∑i(cimi+Ξi(mi)).J(m)=\sum_i\bigl(c_i m_i+\Xi_i(m_i)\bigr).J(m)=i∑​(ci​mi​+Ξi​(mi​)).

For each item, conditions (12) select the first level mˉi\bar m_imˉi​ where adding another unit no longer lowers the convexified cost:

ci+Hi(mˉi+1)−Hi(mˉi)≥0,mˉi>0⟹ci+Hi(mˉi)−Hi(mˉi−1)<0.c_i+H_i(\bar m_i+1)-H_i(\bar m_i)\ge0,\qquad \bar m_i>0\Longrightarrow c_i+H_i(\bar m_i)-H_i(\bar m_i-1)<0.ci​+Hi​(mˉi​+1)−Hi​(mˉi​)≥0,mˉi​>0⟹ci​+Hi​(mˉi​)−Hi​(mˉi​−1)<0.

The second condition is automatic at mˉi=0\bar m_i=0mˉi​=0, following the paper's convention Hi(−1)=+∞H_i(-1)=+\inftyHi​(−1)=+∞ (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 140, Eqs. (11)–(12)).

Formalization targets

The Appendix goal is that each item's conditions (12) have exactly one solution and that the vector formed from those solutions minimizes the original, possibly nonconvex objective:

∀i  ∃!mˉi∈N satisfying (12),J(mˉ)≤J(m)for every m∈NI.\forall i\;\exists!\bar m_i\in\mathbb N\text{ satisfying (12)}, \qquad J(\bar m)\le J(m)\quad\text{for every }m\in\mathbb N^I.∀i∃!mˉi​∈N satisfying (12),J(mˉ)≤J(m)for every m∈NI.

The milestone list follows the Appendix's claims: the lower boundary is a convex minorant; its marginal changes approach zero; (12) has a solution and that solution is unique; it minimizes the convexified single-item cost; and the selected level is a contact point where Hi(mˉi)=Ξi(mˉi)H_i(\bar m_i)=\Xi_i(\bar m_i)Hi​(mˉi​)=Ξi​(mˉi​). The final comparison is with JJJ, not just with the objective formed from HiH_iHi​ (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 140–141).

What the result establishes

The theorem licenses the paper's marginal allocation rule even when an item's original backorder function has nonconvex points. The rule can use a convex lower boundary to identify a level, yet the resulting allocation is optimal for the original function. Without the contact-point conclusion, optimality of the modified objective alone would not give that guarantee. The theorem is stated for any finite number of independent items with the listed properties, so it is reusable beyond the specific depot–base model (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 134–136, 140–141).

The paper proves the result informally. This mission's definitions and theorem statements compile locally as open Lean goals; they do not yet constitute a machine-checked proof. A related published Prove2Me result, ServiceParts.Allocation.allocOpt_correct, proves correctness of an allocation algorithm for piecewise-linear functions assumed convex. It does not address the convexification or contact claim here. The platform's posed ServiceParts.StockLevels.optimal_stock_criterion and greedy_fill_rate_optimal concern other marginal criteria and likewise do not settle this Appendix theorem. A successful development would provide reusable Lean infrastructure for lower convex envelopes of integer sequences, their forward differences, and separable finite allocations.

Difficulty

A one-step marginal comparison on the raw Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is insufficient when its forward differences can fall and then rise: an apparent local stopping point need not minimize the full sequence. Replacing Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ by a convex minorant restores ordered marginal changes, but a minimizer of a smaller function need not minimize the original function. The central burden is therefore the exact relation between the lower boundary and the original points at a level selected by the strict condition in (12). Ties in the objective add a second precision issue: the selected level is unique under the rule even when the objective has more than one minimizer (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 135, 140–141).

Formalization scope and conventions

Stock levels are natural numbers, item contributions and costs are real, and the item type is finite; the empty item type is allowed, making both the sum and the coordinatewise statement trivial. The functions Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ are nonincreasing and bounded below, as in the Appendix. The lower hull is a pointwise real supremum over all discretely convex minorants. Its defining family is nonempty and bounded at each point under the lower-bound hypothesis, which every hull theorem carries. The hull is therefore fixed by the input function rather than supplied as an arbitrary minorant. The goal compares every vector in NI\mathbb N^INI, without a budget restriction. The formalization does not use a default value for Hi(−1)H_i(-1)Hi​(−1): the predecessor condition applies only to positive stock levels.

The paper prints ci≥0c_i\ge0ci​≥0 with at least one positive cost. Its existence assertion fails when a particular ci=0c_i=0ci​=0: for Ξi(m)=1/(m+1)\Xi_i(m)=1/(m+1)Ξi​(m)=1/(m+1), a bounded, decreasing, convex sequence, the first inequality of (12) never holds. The goal and existence milestone therefore require ci>0c_i>0ci​>0 for every present item. The paper's phrase “unique optimizing” is interpreted as uniqueness of the stock vector determined by (12), together with its optimality. It cannot assert uniqueness among all minimizers: with c=1c=1c=1, Ξ(0)=1\Xi(0)=1Ξ(0)=1, and Ξ(m)=0\Xi(m)=0Ξ(m)=0 for m≥1m\ge1m≥1, levels 000 and 111 tie. The proof's own wording identifies (12) as the unique selection rule (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 140).

The formalization contains separate definitions for discrete convexity, the greatest lower hull, conditions (12), and objective (11). It welcomes proofs and general lemmas about convex integer sequences and finite separable sums. The METRIC computation, empirical Air Force data, equations (7)–(9), and the discussion of Lagrangian versus combinatorial solutions are context rather than goals of this mission. A definition that simply sets Hi=ΞiH_i=\Xi_iHi​=Ξi​, or a conclusion that minimizes only the hull objective, would omit the theorem's content.

Selected references

  • Craig C. Sherbrooke, METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control, Operations Research 16(1), 122–141, 1968. DOI: 10.1287/opre.16.1.122.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 3: Under Second-Order Conditions, Tolerances αₖ ≤ q[sup g_r − g_r(yᵏ)] Give |xᵏ − x̄| ≤ s|yᵏ − ȳ|Research Paper

Motivation

The method of multipliers (augmented Lagrangian method), proposed independently by Hestenes and Powell in 1969, solves a constrained optimization problem by a sequence of unconstrained minimizations of a penalized Lagrangian, updating a multiplier estimate between them. It became one of the standard algorithms of nonlinear programming and is the ancestor of ADMM and of the proximal-point view of dual methods. Rockafellar's 1973 paper (Math. Programming 5, 354–373) extended the method to inequality constraints with the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​ and reinterpreted it as unconstrained maximization of a smooth concave dual function grg_rgr​. Its §4 shows that primal points recovered from any maximizing dual sequence are asymptotically minimizing; its §5, the subject of this mission, asks how fast they converge.

Timeline. 1969: Hestenes and Powell introduce multiplier methods for equality constraints. 1973: Rockafellar treats inequality constraints in the convex case through LrL_rLr​ and its dual (this paper), and in the same year applies the multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell to convex programming (J. Optim. Theory Appl. 12). 1976: Rockafellar's "Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming" (Math. Oper. Res. 1) gives the general convergence theory.

Setting

Let X⊂RnX \subset \mathbb R^nX⊂Rn be convex and f0,f1,…,fm:X→Rf_0, f_1, \dots, f_m : X \to \mathbb Rf0​,f1​,…,fm​:X→R convex. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],x∈X, y∈Rm,L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r}\sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big], \qquad x \in X,\ y \in \mathbb R^m,Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],x∈X, y∈Rm,

and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y) over all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm; sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ is its supremum. A maximizing sequence is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​. The dual method of Theorem 4.1 takes a bounded maximizing sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and, for each kkk, a point xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X that minimizes Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk) to within a tolerance αk\alpha_kαk​:

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.(4.7)L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0. \qquad (4.7)Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.(4.7)

The standing assumptions of §5 concern a point xˉ∈int⁡X\bar x \in \operatorname{int} Xxˉ∈intX that is an optimal solution of (P), near which f0,…,fmf_0, \dots, f_mf0​,…,fm​ are twice continuously differentiable, and a multiplier vector yˉ\bar yyˉ​ satisfying with xˉ\bar xxˉ the Kuhn–Tucker conditions (yˉi≥0\bar y_i \ge 0yˉ​i​≥0, fi(xˉ)≤0f_i(\bar x) \le 0fi​(xˉ)≤0, yˉifi(xˉ)=0\bar y_i f_i(\bar x) = 0yˉ​i​fi​(xˉ)=0, and xˉ\bar xxˉ minimizes f0+∑iyˉifif_0 + \sum_i \bar y_i f_if0​+∑i​yˉ​i​fi​ over XXX). With I={i:fi(xˉ)=0}I = \{i : f_i(\bar x) = 0\}I={i:fi​(xˉ)=0} the active set and H(x,y)=∇2f0(x)+∑i∈Iyi∇2fi(x)H(x, y) = \nabla^2 f_0(x) + \sum_{i \in I} y_i \nabla^2 f_i(x)H(x,y)=∇2f0​(x)+∑i∈I​yi​∇2fi​(x), they are: (i) yˉi≠0\bar y_i \ne 0yˉ​i​=0 for i∈Ii \in Ii∈I; (ii) the ∇fi(xˉ)\nabla f_i(\bar x)∇fi​(xˉ), i∈Ii \in Ii∈I, are linearly independent; (iii) z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ)z>0z \cdot H(\bar x, \bar y) z > 0z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ​)z>0 for every nonzero zzz with z⋅∇fi(xˉ)=0z \cdot \nabla f_i(\bar x) = 0z⋅∇fi​(xˉ)=0 for all i∈Ii \in Ii∈I.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 5.3

Under the standing assumptions, with {yk},{xk},{αk}\{y^k\}, \{x^k\}, \{\alpha_k\}{yk},{xk},{αk​} as in (4.7), if for some q>0q > 0q>0

αk≤q [sup⁡gr−gr(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)\alpha_k \le q\,[\sup g_r - g_r(y^k)] \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k, \qquad (5.18)αk​≤q[supgr​−gr​(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)

then there is a constant s>0s > 0s>0 with

∣xk−xˉ∣≤s ∣yk−yˉ∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)|x^k - \bar x| \le s\,|y^k - \bar y| \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k. \qquad (5.19)∣xk−xˉ∣≤s∣yk−yˉ​∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)

No rate for {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is fixed: the statement compares the primal error with the dual error, whatever method produces the dual sequence.

Milestones

  1. xˉ\bar xxˉ is the unique optimal solution to (P) and yˉ\bar yyˉ​ the unique optimal solution to the ordinary dual (D0)(D_0)(D0​) and every (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) for r>0r > 0r>0 (§5, after (5.1)).
  2. Theorem 5.1 (i)–(iii): for every r,β>0r, \beta > 0r,β>0 there are ε,α>0\varepsilon, \alpha > 0ε,α>0 such that sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε and Lr(x,y)−gr(y)≤αL_r(x, y) - g_r(y) \le \alphaLr​(x,y)−gr​(y)≤α force (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) into a β\betaβ-neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​) with x∈int⁡Xx \in \operatorname{int} Xx∈intX, where LrL_rLr​ is C2C^2C2, given locally by (5.4), and ∇x2Lr(x,y)\nabla_x^2 L_r(x, y)∇x2​Lr​(x,y) is positive definite.
  3. Theorem 5.1 (iv): the unique minimizer ξ(y)\xi(y)ξ(y) of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX is C1C^1C1 in yyy with derivative (5.5).
  4. Theorem 5.1 (v): grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with negative definite Hessian (5.6)–(5.7).
  5. Corollary 5.2 (5.14): xk→xˉx^k \to \bar xxk→xˉ and yk→yˉy^k \to \bar yyk→yˉ​.
  6. Corollary 5.2 (5.15)–(5.17): a∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αka|x^k - \xi(y^k)|^2 \le \alpha_ka∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αk​, b1∣yk−yˉ∣I≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2∣yk−yˉ∣Ib_1|y^k - \bar y|_I \le |\xi(y^k) - \bar x| \le b_2|y^k - \bar y|_Ib1​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​, and c1∣yk−yˉ∣2≤gr(yˉ)−gr(yk)≤c2∣yk−yˉ∣2c_1|y^k - \bar y|^2 \le g_r(\bar y) - g_r(y^k) \le c_2|y^k - \bar y|^2c1​∣yk−yˉ​∣2≤gr​(yˉ​)−gr​(yk)≤c2​∣yk−yˉ​∣2.

Significance

Corollary 5.3 is the paper's answer to the practical question of how accurately each inner minimization must be done. A tolerance proportional to the current dual gap costs nothing in the order of convergence: the primal iterates then converge at least as fast as the dual ones. Since grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with a negative definite Hessian near yˉ\bar yyˉ​ (Theorem 5.1 (v)), any locally linearly or superlinearly convergent unconstrained method applied to grg_rgr​ yields a primal sequence with the same rate. The estimates (5.15)–(5.17) are the quantitative bridge between inner accuracy, dual error and primal error, and reappear in later analyses of inexact augmented Lagrangian methods.

The results are proved in the paper (1973) and in textbook treatments; none of them has a machine-checked proof on this platform or in Mathlib. The mission produces a formal statement of the second-order theory of the penalty Lagrangian: the local smooth structure of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​, the implicit minimizer map ξ\xiξ, and the rate comparison. Complete formal proofs of each milestone are the remaining work.

Difficulty

The obvious argument linearizes everything at (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), but LrL_rLr​ is only C1C^1C1 globally: θ2\theta^2θ2 has a kink in its second derivative, so smoothness of LrL_rLr​ must first be established on a neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), using complementary slackness and strict complementarity (i) to fix which branch of (2.4) each constraint follows. The sequence {(xk,yk)}\{(x^k, y^k)\}{(xk,yk)} is not assumed to converge; localizing it into that neighborhood requires the uniform statement of Theorem 5.1 (i) (with ε,α\varepsilon, \alphaε,α chosen after r,βr, \betar,β) and the uniqueness of xˉ\bar xxˉ and yˉ\bar yyˉ​. The minimizer map ξ\xiξ then comes from the implicit function theorem applied to ∇xLr(x,y)=0\nabla_x L_r(x, y) = 0∇x​Lr​(x,y)=0, and the formula for ∇2gr\nabla^2 g_r∇2gr​ needs the derivative of the envelope gr(y)=Lr(ξ(y),y)g_r(y) = L_r(\xi(y), y)gr​(y)=Lr​(ξ(y),y).

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. Primal points lie in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), multipliers in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m); constraint indices are Fin m (0-based), and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument.
  • Functions. The fif_ifi​ are total functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn; convexity is assumed on XXX only (ConvexOn ℝ X, an explicit hypothesis of every theorem, the paper's standing assumption of p. 358), and twice continuous differentiability only on a neighborhood of xˉ\bar xxˉ. Smoothness of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​ is always a conclusion, never a hypothesis.
  • Extended values. g0g_0g0​, grg_rgr​, sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ and the infimum in (P) are computed in EReal, so (4.7), (5.2), (5.3) and (5.18) are differences in [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞]; r>0r > 0r>0 is explicit for the penalty Lagrangian, while L0L_0L0​ is defined separately.
  • Derivatives. Hessians are quadratic forms z⋅D(∇φ)(x)zz \cdot D(\nabla\varphi)(x) zz⋅D(∇φ)(x)z; every inverse matrix appears together with positive definiteness of the same matrix, so Lean's convention that a non-invertible map has inverse 000 never applies. Local identities such as (5.4) are stated as equality on a neighborhood, not globally.
  • Choices. The assumption of Theorem 4.1 that the asymptotic optimal value is finite is omitted because it holds under the §5 assumptions. "Generated as in Theorem 4.1" is spelled out as its hypotheses. In (5.15)–(5.17), ξ\xiξ is any function that picks a minimizer of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX whenever one exists; along yky^kyk it eventually coincides with the paper's unique minimizer. In (iv) and (v), the conclusions are stated for every yyy with sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε, since they do not depend on xxx.
  • Ruled out. The goal does not assume that xkx^kxk or yky^kyk converge, nor that yk≠yˉy^k \ne \bar yyk=yˉ​, and s>0s > 0s>0 is one constant valid for all large kkk; a formalization assuming convergence, or one with an unsatisfiable second-order hypothesis, would be trivial. The standing assumptions and all sequence hypotheses are satisfiable (checked on f0(x)=∣x∣2f_0(x) = |x|^2f0​(x)=∣x∣2, f1(x)=1−e⋅xf_1(x) = 1 - e\cdot xf1​(x)=1−e⋅x in R1\mathbb R^1R1).
  • Infrastructure. The proofs need the implicit function theorem (Mathlib's Analysis/Calculus/Implicit), second derivatives of compositions, envelope differentiation, and the quadratic-growth estimates of a C2C^2C2 function with definite Hessian. Results on Hessian forms and on strict complementarity are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 2: The Dual Supremum Equals the Lower Limit of the Perturbed Infimum, sup (P*) = lim inf_{z→0} inf (P(z))Research Paper

Motivation

A convex minimization problem comes with a dual maximization problem, and the dual value never exceeds the primal value. When the two values differ, a duality gap occurs. Dual bounds, Lagrangian relaxations and optimality certificates are then weaker than hoped. Conditions that rule the gap out are constraint qualifications such as Slater's condition and Rockafellar's notion of a stably set problem. Such conditions say when the gap vanishes, but not what the dual value is when it does not.

R. T. Rockafellar's 1967 paper answers that question for the Fenchel-type pair of problems built from a convex function, a concave function and a continuous linear map between infinite-dimensional spaces. Its Theorem 6 (§6, "Weak duality theorems", pp. 179–180) "explains the exact way in which inf (P) and sup (P*) can fail to be equal", by expressing the dual value through the primal problem alone: the dual supremum is the lower limit of the optimal values of slightly perturbed primal problems. This perturbational view of duality was later developed in Rockafellar's Conjugate Duality and Optimization (1974). It underlies the modern treatment of value functions in convex optimization.

Setting

Two real vector spaces EEE and E∗E^*E∗ are topologically paired when each carries a locally convex Hausdorff topology, they are in duality under a bilinear form ⟨x,x∗⟩\langle x,x^*\rangle⟨x,x∗⟩ that is continuous in each variable, and every continuous linear functional on either space is the pairing with exactly one element of the other. Let (E,E∗)(E,E^*)(E,E∗) and (F,F∗)(F,F^*)(F,F∗) be two such pairs. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear and A∗:F∗→E∗A^*:F^*\to E^*A∗:F∗→E∗ its adjoint, the continuous linear map with ⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩\langle Ax,y^*\rangle=\langle x,A^*y^*\rangle⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩.

A function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] is convex when its epigraph {(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)}\{(x,\mu)\mid\mu\in\mathbb R,\ \mu\ge f(x)\}{(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)} is convex in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R. It is proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere. A function ggg is proper concave when −g-g−g is convex, ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞, and ggg is finite somewhere. The standing hypotheses are that fff is lower semicontinuous proper convex on EEE and ggg is upper semicontinuous proper concave on FFF. Their conjugates are

f∗(x∗)=sup⁡x{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.f^*(x^*)=\sup_{x}\{\langle x,x^*\rangle-f(x)\},\qquad g^*(y^*)=\inf_{y}\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-g(y)\}.f∗(x∗)=xsup​{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=yinf​{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.

The primal problem (P) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈Ex\in Ex∈E. The dual problem (P*) is to maximize g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) over y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗. For z∈Fz\in Fz∈F the perturbed problem (P(zzz)) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z). Its value defines the perturbation function

h(z)=inf⁡(P(z))=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf(\mathrm P(z))=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(\mathrm P).h(z)=inf(P(z))=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The lower semicontinuous hull of hhh is hˉ(y)=lim inf⁡z→yh(z)\bar h(y)=\liminf_{z\to y}h(z)hˉ(y)=liminfz→y​h(z), where z=yz=yz=y is allowed, so that hˉ≤h\bar h\le hhˉ≤h. All infima and suprema are taken in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

sup⁡(P∗)=lim inf⁡z→0 [inf⁡(P(z))],\sup(\mathrm P^*)=\liminf_{z\to 0}\,[\inf(\mathrm P(z))],sup(P∗)=z→0liminf​[inf(P(z))],

valid except in the trivial case where the left side is −∞-\infty−∞ and the right side is +∞+\infty+∞. No consistency, constraint qualification or attainment is assumed, and neither side need be finite. The exception is exactly the stated conjunction. A version assuming (P) consistent would be weaker, since an inconsistent (P), with h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, may still have a finite lower limit.

Milestones: the four claims of the proof (p. 180)

  1. hˉ\bar hhˉ is a lower semicontinuous convex function on FFF.
  2. For every y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗, with hˉ∗(y∗)=sup⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)}\bar h^*(y^*)=\sup_y\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-\bar h(y)\}hˉ∗(y∗)=supy​{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)},
−hˉ∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=inf⁡z{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).-\bar h^*(y^*)=\inf_y\{\bar h(y)-\langle y,y^*\rangle\}=\inf_z\{h(z)-\langle z,y^*\rangle\}=g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*).−hˉ∗(y∗)=yinf​{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=zinf​{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).
  1. (6.2): if hˉ\bar hhˉ is proper, then hˉ(0)=sup⁡y∗{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}\bar h(0)=\sup_{y^*}\{\langle 0,y^*\rangle-\bar h^*(y^*)\}hˉ(0)=supy∗​{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}.
  2. If hˉ\bar hhˉ is not proper, the maximand g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) of (P*) is identically −∞-\infty−∞.

The paper's Lemma 2 (convexity of hhh) is used by the first claim. It is a milestone of the companion mission on Theorem 3 of the same paper and is not restated here.

Significance

Theorem 6 reduces every question about the dual value to a question about the primal value function near the origin. Strong duality inf⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)\inf(\mathrm P)=\sup(\mathrm P^*)inf(P)=sup(P∗) holds exactly when hhh is lower semicontinuous at 000 (outside the trivial case). A duality gap is exactly a downward jump of hhh at 000. The dual of (P*) obeys the same formula, which the paper uses to derive Theorem 7 on normal problems. An integer-lattice analogue appears in discrete convex analysis (Murota, Theorem 8.53, whose duality relation is already stated on Prove2Me as DiscreteConvex.ConjugacyDualityD.general_duality_relations). That statement has no topology and is not the same theorem.

The result is classical and its proof is published. As far as the platform's index shows, no machine-checked statement of it exists in the paper's generality, nor a statement of extended-real biconjugation on general paired locally convex spaces. The value of the mission is a formal proof in the paper's setting: arbitrary topologically paired spaces, extended-real-valued functions, and both the proper and the improper case of the hull. The biconjugation milestone (6.2) and the hull lemma are reusable for other perturbational duality results.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares h(0)h(0)h(0) with the dual objective directly. It cannot give the theorem, because hhh may jump at 000, and the dual objective does not detect the value of hhh at a single point: the target is a lower limit, not a value. In infinite dimensions, conjugacy recovers a function only when it is lower semicontinuous and convex for a topology compatible with the pairing, so the statement depends on the full compatibility of the pairing on FFF, not on a norm. The usual statements of biconjugation cover proper functions only, whereas here the lower limit may take both values ±∞\pm\infty±∞, and both cases of the theorem must be covered. Finally, extended-real arithmetic must be tracked so that the dual objective, defined from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗, is matched in every infinite case.

Formalization scope

Values lie in EReal. Infima and suprema are complete-lattice ⨅ and ⨆, so an empty or unbounded family gives ±∞\pm\infty±∞ as in the paper. The lower limit is Filter.liminf h (nhds y) over the full neighbourhood filter: a punctured limit would change the theorem. Convexity is epigraph convexity in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R, and properness is the paper's two-sided condition. A topological pairing is a structure holding a bilinear map, separate continuity, and existence and uniqueness of representing elements in both directions. No norm, inner product or finite dimension is assumed. The adjoint A∗A^*A∗ is continuous linear data satisfying the adjoint identity. The conjugates f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ are defined by the paper's formulas from fff, ggg, so their regularity is a consequence, not a hypothesis. Properness of fff and ggg excludes the form (+∞)−(+∞)(+\infty)-(+\infty)(+∞)−(+∞) from f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z) and from g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗). No statement is repaired relative to the page.

The dual value is the supremum of the maximand built from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗ as on p. 172. Defining sup⁡(P∗)\sup(\mathrm P^*)sup(P∗) through hˉ\bar hhˉ (for instance as the biconjugate of hˉ\bar hhˉ at 000) would make Theorem 6 true by definition and is ruled out.

A complete development needs extended-real conjugates on paired spaces, the lower semicontinuous hull and the closure of a convex epigraph, and Fenchel–Moreau for proper lower semicontinuous convex functions on a locally convex space. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and lemmas toward Fenchel–Moreau in this generality, are welcome contributions.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967), 167–187. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167
  • W. Fenchel, On conjugate convex functions, Canad. J. Math. 1 (1949), 73–77. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1949-007-x
  • A. Brøndsted, Conjugate convex functions in topological vector spaces, Mat.-Fys. Medd. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. 34 (1964) (reference [2] of the paper; no DOI).
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes en dualité, multigraph, Séminaires de Mathématique, Faculté des Sciences, Université de Montpellier, 1962 (reference [12] of the paper; no DOI).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003, Theorem 8.53. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 1: Approximate Minimizers of L_r(·, yᵏ) along a Bounded Maximizing Dual Sequence Are Asymptotically MinimizingResearch Paper

Motivation

Constrained convex programs are routinely solved by turning them into a sequence of unconstrained problems. The classical route is the ordinary Lagrangian L0(x,y)=f0(x)+∑iyifi(x)L_0(x, y) = f_0(x) + \sum_i y_i f_i(x)L0​(x,y)=f0​(x)+∑i​yi​fi​(x), whose dual function g0g_0g0​ is in general nonsmooth and equal to −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant y≥0y \ge 0y≥0, so maximizing it requires a constrained, nonsmooth method. In 1969 Hestenes (JOTA 4, 1969) and Powell (in Optimization, ed. Fletcher, Academic Press, 1969) proposed the method of multipliers for equality constraints, which adds a quadratic penalty to the Lagrangian. Rockafellar's paper (Math. Programming 5, 1973) gives the inequality-constrained version, the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​, and shows that for convex programs its dual is a smooth, unconstrained, concave maximization problem with the same solutions and value as the ordinary dual. The method of multipliers built on this Lagrangian, now called the augmented Lagrangian method, underlies ADMM and many large-scale solvers.

Timeline. Hestenes and Powell (1969): multiplier method for equality constraints. Rockafellar (1973, this paper; and JOTA 12, 1973): the inequality-constrained penalty Lagrangian, its duality theory, and convergence of the multiplier method for convex programs. Rockafellar (Math. Oper. Res. 1, 1976): the method of multipliers identified as the proximal point algorithm applied to the dual. Bertsekas (Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, 1982): the general nonconvex theory.

This mission covers the first half of the paper: the duality theory of LrL_rLr​ (§3) and the theorem that maximizing the penalty dual yields asymptotically optimal primal sequences (§4, Theorem 4.1).

Setting

Let XXX be a nonempty convex subset of a real vector space EEE and f0,f1,…,fmf_0, f_1, \dots, f_mf0​,f1​,…,fm​ convex real functions on XXX. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

Multipliers yyy range over Rm\mathbb R^mRm, with Euclidean norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ and inner product u⋅yu \cdot yu⋅y. With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r} \sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big],Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],

defined for all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm with no sign restriction. The dual function is gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y), and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes grg_rgr​ over Rm\mathbb R^mRm; g0g_0g0​ and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) are the same with L0L_0L0​, and sup⁡g0\sup g_0supg0​ is the dual optimal value. In Lean these objects are Lr, L0, gr, g0, dualValue, and Fr is the perturbed objective Fr(x,u)=f0(x)+r∣u∣2F_r(x, u) = f_0(x) + r|u|^2Fr​(x,u)=f0​(x)+r∣u∣2 if u≥f(x)u \ge f(x)u≥f(x), +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

A sequence {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} in XXX is asymptotically feasible if lim sup⁡kfi(xk)≤0\limsup_k f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupk​fi​(xk)≤0 for every iii. The asymptotic optimal value (asympValue) is the infimum of lim sup⁡kf0(xk)\limsup_k f_0(x^k)limsupk​f0​(xk) over asymptotically feasible sequences, and a sequence attaining it is asymptotically minimizing (IsAsympMinimizing). A maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

Suppose the asymptotic optimal value in (P) is finite, r>0r > 0r>0, {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is a bounded maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​), and xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X satisfies

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0.Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.

Then {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} is asymptotically minimizing for (P).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1: Lr(x,y)=min⁡u{Fr(x,u)+u⋅y}L_r(x, y) = \min_u \{F_r(x, u) + u \cdot y\}Lr​(x,y)=minu​{Fr​(x,u)+u⋅y}; LrL_rLr​ is convex in xxx and concave in yyy.
  2. Theorem 3.2: gr(y)=max⁡z{g0(z)−14r∣z−y∣2}g_r(y) = \max_z \{g_0(z) - \frac{1}{4r}|z - y|^2\}gr​(y)=maxz​{g0​(z)−4r1​∣z−y∣2}; (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) have the same supremum and optimal solutions; if g0≢−∞g_0 \not\equiv -\inftyg0​≡−∞, grg_rgr​ is finite and C1C^1C1 with ∂gr/∂yi=max⁡{−yi/2r,fi(x)}\partial g_r/\partial y_i = \max\{-y_i/2r, f_i(x)\}∂gr​/∂yi​=max{−yi​/2r,fi​(x)} at any xxx attaining gr(y)g_r(y)gr​(y).
  3. Corollary 3.3: gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)≥gr(y′)≥gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)−14r∣y′−y∣2g_r(y) + (y' - y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) \ge g_r(y') \ge g_r(y) + (y'-y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) - \frac{1}{4r}|y'-y|^2gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)≥gr​(y′)≥gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)−4r1​∣y′−y∣2.
  4. §4 (p. 364): the asymptotic optimal value equals the dual optimal value when the latter is not −∞-\infty−∞ or asymptotically feasible sequences exist.
  5. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3: r∣∇gr(y)∣2≤sup⁡gr−gr(y)r|\nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \sup g_r - g_r(y)r∣∇gr​(y)∣2≤supgr​−gr​(y), and r∣∇yLr(x,y)−∇gr(y)∣2≤αr|\nabla_y L_r(x, y) - \nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \alphar∣∇y​Lr​(x,y)−∇gr​(y)∣2≤α under (4.7).
  6. (4.9)–(4.11): u↦F0(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2u \mapsto F_0(x, u) + u \cdot y + r|u|^2u↦F0​(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2 has the unique minimizer ∇yLr(x,y)\nabla_y L_r(x, y)∇y​Lr​(x,y).

Significance

Theorem 4.1 says that any procedure that drives the smooth, unconstrained dual grg_rgr​ to its supremum, while computing Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk)-minimizers only approximately, produces an asymptotically optimal primal sequence. It needs no constraint qualification, no existence of a dual or primal optimal solution, and not even feasibility of (P): only that the asymptotic optimal value is finite. Together with Theorem 3.2 it justifies the multiplier method as a dual ascent on a C1C^1C1 concave function with Lipschitz gradient, and it is the starting point of the convergence theory of augmented Lagrangian methods.

None of these statements is formalized on Prove2Me or in Mathlib, which has Lagrangian duality only in special forms and no theory of the penalty Lagrangian or of asymptotic optimal values. The Qi–Sun augmented Lagrangian items on the platform (NonsmoothNewton.AugLagrangian.*) use the (r/2)(r/2)(r/2)-scaled function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and concern smoothness in (x,y)(x, y)(x,y), not the dual function. The results of this paper are classical and proved; this mission formalizes them.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the primal iterates with a saddle point: if yˉ\bar yyˉ​ is a dual optimal solution and (P) is normal, approximate minimizers of Lr(⋅,yˉ)L_r(\cdot, \bar y)Lr​(⋅,yˉ​) are approximately optimal. Theorem 4.1 assumes neither. The function grg_rgr​ need not attain its supremum, (P) need not be normal or even feasible, and there may be no Kuhn–Tucker vector, so there is no saddle point to compare with; the only data are the dual values gr(yk)g_r(y^k)gr​(yk), the boundedness of {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and the tolerances αk\alpha_kαk​. The difficulty is to obtain primal feasibility and optimality information from dual convergence alone, measured against the asymptotic optimal value rather than the infimum in (P). Every ingredient is extended-real-valued: g0g_0g0​ is −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant, grg_rgr​ may be identically −∞-\infty−∞, and the asymptotic optimal value may be ±∞\pm\infty±∞. Mathlib does not package this part of convex analysis (partial conjugates, envelopes of extended-real concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem).

Formalization scope

EEE is a bare real vector space (AddCommGroup E, Module ℝ E) with no topology, as in the paper. The functions fif_ifi​ are total functions E→RE \to \mathbb RE→R assumed convex on XXX; only their values on XXX enter. Constraint indices are Fin m (0-based) and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument. Multipliers live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The standing assumption of §3 (XXX nonempty convex, all fif_ifi​ convex) is a hypothesis of every theorem.

Explicit choices:

  • grg_rgr​, g0g_0g0​, the dual value, the asymptotic optimal value and every lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup are computed in EReal, so ±∞\pm\infty±∞ are represented and no infimum is replaced by a junk real value.
  • r>0r > 0r>0 is an explicit hypothesis wherever LrL_rLr​ is used; L0L_0L0​ is a separate definition.
  • (4.7) is written Lr(xk,yk)≤gr(yk)+αkL_r(x^k, y^k) \le g_r(y^k) + \alpha_kLr​(xk,yk)≤gr​(yk)+αk​ in EReal, equivalent to the printed difference; only αk→0\alpha_k \to 0αk​→0 is assumed.
  • Concavity or convexity of extended-real functions is stated through convex hypographs and epigraphs; "max" in (3.5) is attainment of the greatest value.
  • Gradients are taken of the real coercion of grg_rgr​, and only under hypotheses that make grg_rgr​ finite.
  • Dual optimal solutions do not exist when gr≡−∞g_r \equiv -\inftygr​≡−∞ (the paper's convention, p. 361).
  • Lemmas 4.2, 4.3 and (4.9)–(4.11) are stated for one point rather than along a sequence; the paper's statements are their instances.
  • Misprints: "concave in y∈Yy \in Yy∈Y" (Theorem 3.1) reads Rm\mathbb R^mRm; the lost minus sign in Lemma 4.2 is restored.

The goal must not be replaced by "f0(xk)→inf⁡(P)f_0(x^k) \to \inf\text{(P)}f0​(xk)→inf(P) and lim sup⁡fi(xk)≤0\limsup f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupfi​(xk)≤0": that is the special case of normal problems with feasible solutions. Nor may it assume a Slater point, a Kuhn–Tucker vector, or feasibility of (P), each of which makes it a special case.

A complete development needs extended-real convex analysis on Rm\mathbb R^mRm (partial conjugates, Moreau envelopes of concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem), which is reusable beyond this mission. Contributions proving any milestone, or general lemmas on Moreau envelopes of extended-real concave functions, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, Academic Press, 1982.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 1: A Convex Program Is Stably Set If and Only If Its Infimum Equals the Attained Maximum of the Dual, inf (P) = max (P*)Research Paper

Motivation

In convex optimization, a dual problem supplies a bound on what a primal minimization problem can achieve. The bound can be useful even when no minimizer is known, but an equality of the primal and dual values says more: it certifies that the bound is exact. In applications, one also wants a dual variable that actually attains the bound, since that variable can act as a multiplier or a sensitivity certificate. Rockafellar's 1967 paper asks when such an attained equality follows from the behavior of the primal value under small changes to the problem Rockafellar 1967.

The paper works with locally convex spaces paired with their continuous duals, rather than limiting the question to finite-dimensional vectors or normed spaces. In this setting, ordinary finite-dimensional constraint qualifications need not describe the relevant behavior. Theorem 3 gives a criterion in terms of the perturbation function itself. It also states the corresponding criterion with the primal and dual roles reversed Rockafellar 1967, §5.

Setting

Let EEE and E′E'E′ be real locally convex Hausdorff spaces in topological duality, with pairing ⟨x,x′⟩E\langle x,x'\rangle_E⟨x,x′⟩E​. Let FFF and F′F'F′ be another such pair. Each pairing represents every continuous linear functional on either member uniquely by a point of the other member. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear, and let its continuous adjoint A∗:F′→E′A^*:F'\to E'A∗:F′→E′ satisfy ⟨Ax,y′⟩F=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E\langle Ax,y'\rangle_F=\langle x,A^*y'\rangle_E⟨Ax,y′⟩F​=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E​.

The primal data are a lower semicontinuous proper convex function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] and an upper semicontinuous proper concave function g:F→[−∞,+∞]g:F\to[-\infty,+\infty]g:F→[−∞,+∞]. Here proper means that fff never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere, while ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞ and is finite somewhere. Convexity means convexity of the real epigraph, and concavity means convexity of −g-g−g. Their conjugates are f∗(x′)=sup⁡x(⟨x,x′⟩E−f(x))f^*(x')=\sup_x(\langle x,x'\rangle_E-f(x))f∗(x′)=supx​(⟨x,x′⟩E​−f(x)) and g∗(y′)=inf⁡y(⟨y,y′⟩F−g(y))g^*(y')=\inf_y(\langle y,y'\rangle_F-g(y))g∗(y′)=infy​(⟨y,y′⟩F​−g(y)) Rockafellar 1967, §2.

The primal problem (P)(P)(P) minimizes f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over EEE. Its dual (P∗)(P^*)(P∗) maximizes g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′)g^*(y')-f^*(A^*y')g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′) over F′F'F′. A translation z∈Fz\in Fz∈F changes the primal objective to f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z), giving

h(z)=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(P).h(z)=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The primal problem is stably set when it is consistent, meaning h(0)<+∞h(0)<+\inftyh(0)<+∞, and when directional rates of change of hhh at zero cannot be arbitrarily negative in every neighborhood of zero. The instability test is made only when h(0)h(0)h(0) is finite. Consequently h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞ counts as stable, as the paper explicitly observes Rockafellar 1967, §4–5. The dual stability condition is the same definition applied to the dual's minimization form (P′)(P')(P′), with perturbations in E′E'E′.

Formalization targets

The goal is both directions of Theorem 3, including the dual statement:

(P) stably set⟺inf⁡(P)=max⁡(P∗),(P)\text{ stably set}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \inf(P)=\max(P^*),(P) stably set⟺inf(P)=max(P∗), min⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.\min(P)=\sup(P^*)\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad (P^*)\text{ stably set}.min(P)=sup(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.

The symbols max⁡\maxmax and min⁡\minmin assert that the stated value is attained. A statement equating only an infimum and a supremum would omit part of the theorem. The mission's milestones are the convexity of hhh (Lemma 2), the equivalence between stability and a nonempty subdifferential ∂h(0)\partial h(0)∂h(0), the criterion linking a subgradient to inequality (5.1), and weak duality (Lemma 1). Each is a claim stated in the paper's proof or as a numbered lemma Rockafellar 1967, pp. 174, 178–179.

Significance

The theorem turns a local property of the optimal-value function into an exact, attained duality statement. A dual optimum has operational meaning: its point y′∈F′y'\in F'y′∈F′ is a continuous linear response to perturbations z∈Fz\in Fz∈F, expressed through ⟨z,y′⟩F\langle z,y'\rangle_F⟨z,y′⟩F​. The converse says that attained exact duality already forces the same stability property. The dual half adds a symmetric criterion for attainment of the primal minimum Rockafellar 1967, Theorem 3.

The 1967 result is proved in the cited paper; this mission asks for its Lean formalization. A complete development would give reusable definitions for paired locally convex spaces, extended-real conjugates, epigraph convexity, and perturbation-based stability. The milestone statements expose the intermediate mathematical claims separately, so later formalizations can use the parts they need without importing the entire theorem.

Difficulty

Weak duality by itself gives only an inequality. It does not supply a dual point achieving the primal infimum, and equality of two extended-real lattice values does not establish attainment. The central issue is that a perturbation function can have a finite value at zero yet fall at arbitrarily steep rates in nearby directions; then no continuous linear support at zero need exist. Infinite primal values bring two additional cases: inconsistency when h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, and the paper's stable case when h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞. The dual half requires the topology on E′E'E′ because the translated dual problem is perturbed there Rockafellar 1967, §§4–5.

Formalization scope

The Lean representation uses EReal for all objective and conjugate values; its complete lattice gives the paper's ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values for unbounded or empty extrema. Spaces are arbitrary locally convex Hausdorff real topological vector spaces equipped with a pairing that identifies each space with the continuous linear dual of the other. The adjoint is continuous linear data constrained by the pairing identity. Properness rules out endpoint arithmetic of the form +∞−(+∞)+\infty-(+\infty)+∞−(+∞) in the primal and dual objectives. The conjugates are defined from fff and ggg; their regularity is not assumed separately.

Stability is encoded using the positive one-sided lower limit of directional difference quotients, which equals the paper's limit for convex hhh. It requires consistency and excludes arbitrarily negative rates in every neighborhood. It is not defined by ∂h(0)≠∅\partial h(0)\ne\varnothing∂h(0)=∅: that equivalence is an independent milestone. Attained extrema are represented by greatest and least elements of the ranges of the objective functions, rather than by equality of lattice values alone. The formalization includes both halves of Theorem 3 and all four listed milestones. Contributions toward general convex analysis on paired spaces and toward the extended-real endpoint cases are useful beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 21 (1967), 167–187. DOI: 10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 1: In the Convex Case Progressive Hedging Converges to Optimal Solutions of (P) and (D) Exactly When They ExistResearch Paper

Motivation

Decisions under uncertainty are often modelled by a finite set of scenarios: possible futures s∈Ss\in Ss∈S with weights psp_sps​, each with its own optimization problem. Solving every scenario separately is easy but useless in practice, because the decision taken today cannot depend on which scenario will be revealed tomorrow. Progressive hedging, introduced by Rockafellar and Wets in Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty (IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1), 1991), restores this nonanticipativity by iterating between scenario-wise solves and an averaging step, guided by price systems that act as multipliers. It is the standard decomposition method for multistage stochastic programs and is implemented in widely used software such as PySP/mpi-sppy. This mission formalizes the paper's convergence theorem in the convex case, Theorem 5.1, together with the duality theory of §4 and the proof steps of §5 it rests on.

Setting

Let SSS be a finite set of scenarios with weights ps>0p_s>0ps​>0, ∑sps=1\sum_s p_s=1∑s​ps​=1. For each sss the scenario subproblem (Ps)(P_s)(Ps​) is to minimize fs(x)f_s(x)fs​(x) over x∈Cs⊂Rnx\in C_s\subset\mathbb R^nx∈Cs​⊂Rn, where CsC_sCs​ is nonempty and closed and fsf_sfs​ is locally Lipschitz with bounded level sets {x∈Cs∣fs(x)≤α}\{x\in C_s\mid f_s(x)\le\alpha\}{x∈Cs​∣fs​(x)≤α}. The convex case is when every fsf_sfs​ and CsC_sCs​ is convex.

A decision vector is split by time, x=(x1,…,xT)x=(x_1,\dots,x_T)x=(x1​,…,xT​). A policy is a map X:S→RnX:S\to\mathbb R^nX:S→Rn; the policy space E\mathcal EE carries the inner product ⟨X,Y⟩=∑spsX(s)⋅Y(s)\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_s p_s X(s)\cdot Y(s)⟨X,Y⟩=∑s​ps​X(s)⋅Y(s) and norm ∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|=\langle X,X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2. At each time ttt the scenarios are partitioned into bundles A∈AtA\in\mathcal A_tA∈At​ of scenarios that cannot yet be told apart. The aggregation X^=JX\hat X=JXX^=JX replaces Xt(s)X_t(s)Xt​(s) by its ppp-weighted average over the bundle of sss at time ttt, and K=I−JK=I-JK=I−J. The implementable policies are N={X∣Xt\mathcal N=\{X\mid X_tN={X∣Xt​ constant on each A∈At}A\in\mathcal A_t\}A∈At​}, the price systems are M={W∣JW=0}=N⊥\mathcal M=\{W\mid JW=0\}=\mathcal N^\perpM={W∣JW=0}=N⊥, and the admissible policies are C={X∣X(s)∈Cs ∀s}\mathcal C=\{X\mid X(s)\in C_s\ \forall s\}C={X∣X(s)∈Cs​ ∀s}. With F(X)=∑spsfs(X(s))F(X)=\sum_s p_s f_s(X(s))F(X)=∑s​ps​fs​(X(s)) the problem is

(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.(P)\qquad \text{minimize } F(X) \text{ subject to } X\in\mathcal C\cap\mathcal N .(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.

Its Lagrangian is L(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩L(X,W)=F(X)+\langle X,W\rangleL(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩ on C×M\mathcal C\times\mathcal MC×M, the dual is (D)(D)(D): maximize G(W)=inf⁡X∈CL(X,W)G(W)=\inf_{X\in\mathcal C}L(X,W)G(W)=infX∈C​L(X,W) over W∈MW\in\mathcal MW∈M with G(W)>−∞G(W)>-\inftyG(W)>−∞.

The progressive hedging algorithm fixes r>0r>0r>0, starts from any X0X^0X0 and any W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M, and in iteration ν\nuν sets X^ν=JXν\hat X^\nu=JX^\nuX^ν=JXν, lets Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) minimize

fs(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+12r ∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Csf_s(x)+x\cdot W^\nu(s)+\tfrac12 r\,|x-\hat X^\nu(s)|^2\quad\text{over } x\in C_sfs​(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+21​r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Cs​

for every scenario, and updates Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1W^{\nu+1}=W^\nu+rKX^{\nu+1}Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

In the convex case with exact minimization, the sequences {X^ν}\{\hat X^\nu\}{X^ν} and {Wν}\{W^\nu\}{Wν} are bounded if and only if (P) and (D) have optimal solutions. In that case there are optimal X∗X^*X∗ for (P) and W∗W^*W∗ for (D) with

X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,\hat X^\nu\to X^*,\qquad W^\nu\to W^*,X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,

and, with ∥(X,W)∥r=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2\|(X,W)\|_r=(\|X\|^2+r^{-2}\|W\|^2)^{1/2}∥(X,W)∥r​=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2,

∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r\le\|(\hat X^{\nu},W^{\nu})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​

for all ν≥0\nu\ge0ν≥0, strictly unless (X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)=(X^*,W^*)(X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗), and the step lengths ∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r​ are nonincreasing from ν=1\nu=1ν=1 on.

Milestones

  1. Propositions 3.1–3.3: existence for the scenario subproblems, the lower bound α^=min⁡CF=E{min⁡(Ps)}≤min⁡(P)\hat\alpha=\min_{\mathcal C}F=E\{\min(P_s)\}\le\min(P)α^=minC​F=E{min(Ps​)}≤min(P), well-posedness of every modified subproblem (unique solution in the convex case), and compact level sets of FFF on C\mathcal CC.
  2. Theorem 4.2 and Proposition 4.4 (in the convex case): the scenario-wise subgradient conditions −W∗(s)∈∂fs(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))-W^*(s)\in\partial f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W∗(s)∈∂fs​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s)) are equivalent to a saddle point of LLL, and the analogous conditions are necessary and sufficient for the iterates.
  3. Proposition 4.5 and Theorem 4.6: the perturbation function Φ(U)=min⁡{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U}\Phi(U)=\min\{F(X)\mid X\in\mathcal C,\ KX=U\}Φ(U)=min{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U} and the duality −∞<min⁡(P)=sup⁡(D)-\infty<\min(P)=\sup(D)−∞<min(P)=sup(D), argmax⁡(D)=−∂Φ(0)\operatorname{argmax}(D)=-\partial\Phi(0)argmax(D)=−∂Φ(0).
  4. Proposition 5.3: each iteration is the unique saddle point of a proximal saddle function.
  5. From the proof of Theorem 5.1: firm nonexpansiveness (5.26) of the iteration map in ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​, and the identification of its fixed points with primal–dual optimal pairs.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 is the guarantee behind progressive hedging in the convex case: solving only small scenario problems and averaging, the method finds a nonanticipative optimal policy and an optimal price system whenever these exist, with a distance to the solution that never increases. The dual sequence WνW^\nuWν converges to a solution of (D), which gives the prices of information that the paper interprets economically. Boundedness of the iterates is an exact test for solvability.

The result is classical and fully proved on paper; its proof reduces the algorithm to Rockafellar's proximal point algorithm for a maximal monotone operator. No machine-checked version is known to exist. The mission produces a formal statement and, eventually, a proof of the full chain from scenario data to convergence, including the duality theorem of §4, which is of independent use for scenario-based stochastic programming. A related platform mission in this series treats the nonconvex case (limits of the algorithm satisfy first-order conditions).

Difficulty

The algorithm is not a proximal point method in the variable XXX: it acts on the pair (X^,W)(\hat X,W)(X^,W), and the averaged policy X^ν\hat X^\nuX^ν is in general not admissible while XνX^\nuXν is in general not implementable. The step that fails in a direct attempt is showing that the map (X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\mapsto(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})(X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1) is firmly nonexpansive, which requires recognizing it as the resolvent of the monotone operator of a saddle function restricted to N×M\mathcal N\times\mathcal MN×M, in the rescaled norm ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ rather than in the original product norm. A second difficulty is duality: identifying the fixed points of the iteration with optimal pairs of (P) and (D) needs the convex duality theory of §4 for an extended-real-valued perturbation function without any constraint qualification.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); policies are functions S → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with S a Fintype. Time periods are a monotone map assigning each coordinate to its period, and each At\mathcal A_tAt​ is a Setoid S; no refinement between periods is assumed. The standing assumptions of §3 are fields of the model structure, and the convex case is a separate hypothesis.

The inner product (2.2), norm (2.3) and ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ (5.2) are explicit weighted sums. Mathlib's norm on a function type is the sup norm; it is used only for topology (boundedness, convergence, local Lipschitz continuity, compactness), which coincides with that of (2.3) in finite dimension. Stating (5.3) or (5.26) with Mathlib's sup norm would change the inequalities and is ruled out. Optimal values min⁡(P)\min(P)min(P), sup⁡(D)\sup(D)sup(D), GGG, Φ\PhiΦ, α^\hat\alphaα^ and ℓ\ellℓ are EReal infima and suprema, so that infeasibility gives +∞+\infty+∞ and an unbounded dual objective gives −∞-\infty−∞; real-valued sInf would silently return 000 there. A solution of (D) must have G(W∗)>−∞G(W^*)>-\inftyG(W∗)>−∞. The algorithm is a predicate on sequences, with X0X^0X0 arbitrary and W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M; Proposition 3.2 shows the predicate is satisfiable.

Subgradients and normal cones are those of convex analysis; the normal cone is the published definition FirstOrderOpt.ConvexTheory.normalCone. Not formalized: the nonconvex (Clarke) parts of §4, the linear-quadratic case and its rate result, and inexact minimization.

A complete development needs: separable minimization over product sets, finite-dimensional compactness arguments, convex duality for a perturbation function on a subspace, and the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators (Rockafellar 1976, Theorem 1 and Proposition 1). The last two are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of either as standalone results are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1):119–147, 1991. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/2933/ — https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.1.119
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14(5):877–898, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • G. J. Minty, Monotone (nonlinear) operators in Hilbert space, Duke Mathematical Journal 29(3):341–346, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-62-02933-2
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1: With Bounded Constraint Sets the Two-Stage Stochastic Convex Program Satisfies min P = sup DResearch Paper

Motivation

A two-stage stochastic program with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision is fixed before a random outcome is observed, and a second-stage (recourse) decision is chosen after the outcome is known, both subject to constraints and both incurring costs. The model is the standard framework for planning under uncertainty in operations research: capacity planning, production and inventory, energy dispatch, finance.

For linear recourse problems, duality was developed in the 1960s and early 1970s by Wets and others, partly under integrability restrictions on the random data. R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976), doi:10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173), treat the convex case, where every cost and constraint function is convex, by embedding the problem in a family of perturbed problems and applying the perturbational theory of convex duality (Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, SIAM 1974) together with the theory of convex integral functionals. The paper's dual variables are integrable price systems, interpreted as equilibrium prices for perturbations of the constraints; it is the starting point of a series of papers by the same authors on stochastic convex programming (relatively complete recourse, Kuhn–Tucker conditions, singular multipliers).

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. A vector x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​ is chosen subject to x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤0f_{1i}(x_1)\le 0f1i​(x1​)≤0 (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), at cost f10(x1)f_{10}(x_1)f10​(x1​). Then s∈Ss\in Ss∈S is observed and x2(s)∈Rn2x_2(s)\in\mathbb R^{n_2}x2​(s)∈Rn2​ is chosen subject to x2(s)∈C2x_2(s)\in C_2x2​(s)∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2(s))≤0f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\le 0f2i​(s,x1​,x2​(s))≤0 (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), at cost f20(s,x1,x2(s))f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s)). The aim is to minimize the expected cost

f10(x1)+∫Sf20(s,x1,x2(s)) σ(ds).f_{10}(x_1)+\int_S f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\,\sigma(ds).f10​(x1​)+∫S​f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s))σ(ds).

The standing assumptions are: C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ convex, closed and nonempty; f1if_{1i}f1i​ and f2i(s,⋅,⋅)f_{2i}(s,\cdot,\cdot)f2i​(s,⋅,⋅) convex and finite everywhere; s↦f2i(s,x1,x2)s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)s↦f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge 1i≥1.

Decisions live in X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​ and perturbations in U=Rm1×Lm2∞U=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{m_2}U=Rm1​×Lm2​∞​. The perturbation functional F(x,u)F(x,u)F(x,u) is the expected cost if xxx satisfies the constraints with right-hand sides u1u_1u1​ and, almost surely, u2(s)u_2(s)u2​(s), and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. The problem P\mathbf PP minimizes F(x,0)F(x,0)F(x,0).

The space Y=Rm1×Lm21Y=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{m_2}Y=Rm1​×Lm2​1​ is paired with UUU by ⟨u,y⟩=u1⋅y1+∫Su2(s)⋅y2(s) σ(ds)\langle u,y\rangle=u_1\cdot y_1+\int_S u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)\,\sigma(ds)⟨u,y⟩=u1​⋅y1​+∫S​u2​(s)⋅y2​(s)σ(ds), and V=Rn1×Ln21V=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{n_2}V=Rn1​×Ln2​1​ with XXX in the same way. The Lagrangian is L(x,y)=inf⁡u∈U{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}L(x,y)=\inf_{u\in U}\{\langle u,y\rangle+F(x,u)\}L(x,y)=infu∈U​{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}, the dual D\mathbf DD maximizes g(y)=inf⁡x∈XL(x,y)g(y)=\inf_{x\in X}L(x,y)g(y)=infx∈X​L(x,y) over y∈Yy\in Yy∈Y, and the perturbation function is φ(u)=inf⁡x∈XF(x,u)\varphi(u)=\inf_{x\in X}F(x,u)φ(u)=infx∈X​F(x,u). Conjugates φ∗\varphi^*φ∗, φ∗∗\varphi^{**}φ∗∗ are taken with respect to the pairing of UUU with YYY.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

If C1C_1C1​ and C2C_2C2​ are bounded, then

min⁡P=sup⁡D>−∞,\min\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf D>-\infty,minP=supD>−∞,

and in fact φ\varphiφ is a proper convex function on UUU, lower semicontinuous for the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), the infimum defining φ(u)\varphi(u)φ(u) is attained for every u∈Uu\in Uu∈U, and φ∗∗=φ\varphi^{**}=\varphiφ∗∗=φ. The goal is the theorem exactly as printed, all conclusions included.

Milestones

  1. p. 174: for bounded measurable x1(⋅)x_1(\cdot)x1​(⋅), x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), the functions s↦f2i(s,x1(s),x2(s))s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1(s),x_2(s))s↦f2i​(s,x1​(s),x2​(s)) are measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and essentially bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1.
  2. Proposition 3: FFF is convex, not identically +∞+\infty+∞, and lower semicontinuous on X×UX\times UX×U for the norm topology and for the weak topology induced by V×YV\times YV×Y.
  3. (4.9): with C1,C2C_1,C_2C1​,C2​ bounded, X0={x:x1∈C1, x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0=\{x: x_1\in C_1,\ x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0​={x:x1​∈C1​, x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is weakly compact in XXX, and X0′={x2∈Ln2∞:x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0'=\{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}: x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0′​={x2​∈Ln2​∞​:x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is compact in σ(Ln2∞,Ln21)\sigma(\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2},\mathcal L^1_{n_2})σ(Ln2​∞​,Ln2​1​).
  4. (4.1): g(y)=inf⁡u{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y)g(y)=\inf_{u}\{\langle u,y\rangle+\varphi(u)\}=-\varphi^*(-y)g(y)=infu​{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y).
  5. (4.2): φ∗∗(0)=sup⁡D\varphi^{**}(0)=\sup\mathbf Dφ∗∗(0)=supD.

The mission also poses the explicit form (1.8) of the Lagrangian and Corollary 1 (dual solutions are the negatives of subgradients of φ\varphiφ at 000; saddle-point characterization of primal solutions when ∂φ(0)≠∅\partial\varphi(0)\ne\emptyset∂φ(0)=∅).

Significance

Theorem 3 gives, for bounded constraint sets, the absence of a duality gap between a convex recourse problem with essentially bounded decisions and its Lagrangian dual over integrable multipliers, together with existence of an optimal decision. Through Corollary 1 it reduces the necessity of the Kuhn–Tucker (saddle-point) optimality conditions to the single question whether ∂φ(0)\partial\varphi(0)∂φ(0) is nonempty, and through the paper's later results it describes the directional derivatives of the optimal value with respect to perturbations of the constraints.

The result has been proved since 1976; it has not been machine-checked. A formal development produces the problem model on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ and L1\mathcal L^1L1 spaces, the weak topologies of the pairings, and conjugate duality for extended-real-valued functions on such paired spaces, none of which is currently available as a ready-made Lean statement on this platform.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two points. First, inf⁡P=sup⁡D\inf\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf DinfP=supD is φ(0)=φ∗∗(0)\varphi(0)=\varphi^{**}(0)φ(0)=φ∗∗(0), and the biconjugate equals φ\varphiφ only for a lower semicontinuous proper convex function in a topology compatible with the pairing. Lower semicontinuity of φ\varphiφ in the norm topology of UUU is not enough: the pairing is with L1\mathcal L^1L1, not with the norm dual of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞, so the relevant topology is the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), and an infimum of lower semicontinuous functions is in general not lower semicontinuous. Second, the lower semicontinuity of FFF itself, in the weak topology, is a statement about convex integral functionals on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ that rests on measurability of the integrands in sss jointly with continuity in the decision variables. Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is what supplies the compactness that is otherwise missing.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ and the products u1⋅y1u_1\cdot y_1u1​⋅y1​, u2(s)⋅y2(s)u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)u2​(s)⋅y2​(s) are dot products. Constraint indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m.
  • Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Ln1\mathcal L^1_nLn1​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) ⊤ σ and Lp (Fin n → ℝ) 1 σ, spaces of almost-everywhere classes; all second-stage conditions are stated almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure (IsProbabilityMeasure).
  • Values in R∪{±∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}R∪{±∞} are EReal; infima and suprema are lattice operations in EReal, so there are no junk values for empty or unbounded sets. Every sum has a real first summand, so no ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ convention enters.
  • The expected cost is a real Bochner integral; its integrand is summable for x2∈L∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\inftyx2​∈L∞ (milestone 1), so it is the true expected cost. No extended-real-valued function is ever integrated.
  • A weak topology "induced by the pairing" is the coarsest topology making every functional of the pairing continuous; the product weak topology on X×UX\times UX×U is the product of the two. These are passed explicitly. Replacing them by the norm topologies would make the lower semicontinuity statements strictly weaker and the compactness statement false; such a formalization does not count.
  • An extended-real function is convex when its epigraph is convex, and proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is somewhere finite.
  • Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is assumed exactly where the paper assumes it: Theorem 3, (4.9) and Corollary 1.

A complete development needs the identification of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ with the dual of L1\mathcal L^1L1 on a probability space (for weak-* compactness), lower semicontinuity of convex integral functionals, and conjugate duality on paired locally convex spaces. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of milestones, and of auxiliary lemmas of this kind as separate theorems, are welcome. The mission Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2 formalizes the paper's other main result, on the first-stage problem and attainment of the recourse.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, II, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 39(2) (1971) 439–469. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1971.39.439
  • R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic programs with fixed recourse: the equivalent deterministic program, SIAM Review 16(3) (1974) 309–339. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Duality in Constrained Portfolio Optimization I: Financibility, Minimality, Dual Optimality and Parsimony of an Auxiliary Market Are Equivalent and Yield the Optimal Constrained PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

An investor in a continuous-time market chooses, at every instant, how to split wealth between a bond and ddd stocks and how fast to consume, so as to maximize expected utility of consumption and terminal wealth. Without constraints on the portfolio, this problem was solved by the martingale method: Pliska (1986), Karatzas, Lehoczky and Shreve (1987) and Cox and Huang (1989) showed that in a complete market the optimal terminal wealth and consumption are explicit functions of a single state-price density, and the portfolio that finances them comes from the martingale representation theorem.

Real investors face constraints: no short selling, no borrowing, a cap on the fraction of wealth in a sector, an incomplete market in which some stocks cannot be traded at all. Each makes the market effectively incomplete, and the single state-price density no longer exists. Karatzas, Lehoczky, Shreve and Xu (1991) treated incompleteness, Xu (1990, thesis) short-selling prohibition, and He and Pearson (1991) short-sale constraints in a general setting. Cvitanić and Karatzas (1992) unified these cases: the portfolio must take values in an arbitrary nonempty closed convex set K⊂RdK\subset\mathbb R^dK⊂Rd, and the problem is embedded in a family of auxiliary unconstrained markets indexed by a dual process ν\nuν. This mission formalizes the paper's central characterization, Theorem 10.1, and the results its proof rests on.

Setting

A standard Brownian motion WWW in Rd\mathbb R^dRd lives on a complete probability space with its augmented filtration {Ft}\{\mathcal F_t\}{Ft​}, on a finite horizon [0,T][0,T][0,T]. The market M\mathcal MM has progressively measurable interest rate rrr, appreciation rates bbb and volatility matrix σ\sigmaσ, with r≥−ηr\ge-\etar≥−η, ξ∗σσ∗ξ≥ε∥ξ∥2\xi^*\sigma\sigma^*\xi\ge\varepsilon\|\xi\|^2ξ∗σσ∗ξ≥ε∥ξ∥2, E∫0Tr dt<∞E\int_0^Tr\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​rdt<∞, and a relative risk θ=σ−1(b−r1)\theta=\sigma^{-1}(b-r\mathbf 1)θ=σ−1(b−r1) with E∫0T∥θ∥2dt<∞E\int_0^T\|\theta\|^2dt<\inftyE∫0T​∥θ∥2dt<∞. The state-price density is H0=γ0Z0H_0=\gamma_0Z_0H0​=γ0​Z0​, with γ0(t)=e−∫0tr\gamma_0(t)=e^{-\int_0^tr}γ0​(t)=e−∫0t​r and Z0(t)=exp⁡(−∫0tθ∗dW−12∫0t∥θ∥2)Z_0(t)=\exp(-\int_0^t\theta^*dW-\frac12\int_0^t\|\theta\|^2)Z0​(t)=exp(−∫0t​θ∗dW−21​∫0t​∥θ∥2).

A portfolio π\piπ gives the proportions of wealth in the stocks, a consumption rate is c≥0c\ge0c≥0, and the wealth solves

dX=(rX−c) dt+Xπ∗σ (dW+θ dt),X(0)=x>0.dX=(rX-c)\,dt+X\pi^*\sigma\,(dW+\theta\,dt),\qquad X(0)=x>0.dX=(rX−c)dt+Xπ∗σ(dW+θdt),X(0)=x>0.

The pair is admissible, (π,c)∈A0(x)(\pi,c)\in\mathcal A_0(x)(π,c)∈A0​(x), if X≥0X\ge0X≥0. With utility functions U1(t,⋅)U_1(t,\cdot)U1​(t,⋅), U2U_2U2​ (strictly increasing, strictly concave, C1C^1C1, U′(0+)=∞U'(0+)=\inftyU′(0+)=∞, U′(∞)=0U'(\infty)=0U′(∞)=0), inverse marginals I1,I2I_1,I_2I1​,I2​ and conjugates U~1,U~2\tilde U_1,\tilde U_2U~1​,U~2​, the investor maximizes

J(x;π,c)=E∫0TU1(t,c(t)) dt+EU2(X(T))J(x;\pi,c)=E\int_0^TU_1(t,c(t))\,dt+EU_2(X(T))J(x;π,c)=E∫0T​U1​(t,c(t))dt+EU2​(X(T))

over A′(x)\mathcal A'(x)A′(x), the admissible pairs with integrable utility losses and π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K almost everywhere. The value is V(x)V(x)V(x).

The support function δ(ν)=sup⁡π∈K(−π∗ν)∈R∪{+∞}\delta(\nu)=\sup_{\pi\in K}(-\pi^*\nu)\in\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}δ(ν)=supπ∈K​(−π∗ν)∈R∪{+∞} drives the duality. For ν\nuν in the class D\mathcal DD of square-integrable processes with E∫0Tδ(ν) dt<∞E\int_0^T\delta(\nu)\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​δ(ν)dt<∞, the auxiliary market Mν\mathcal M_\nuMν​ has interest rate r+δ(ν)r+\delta(\nu)r+δ(ν) and appreciation rates b+ν+δ(ν)1b+\nu+\delta(\nu)\mathbf 1b+ν+δ(ν)1, state-price density HνH_\nuHν​ and unconstrained value Vν(x)V_\nu(x)Vν​(x). For λ\lambdaλ in the subclass D′\mathcal D'D′ (where Xλ(y)=E[∫0THλI1(t,yHλ) dt+Hλ(T)I2(yHλ(T))]\mathcal X_\lambda(y)=E[\int_0^TH_\lambda I_1(t,yH_\lambda)\,dt+H_\lambda(T)I_2(yH_\lambda(T))]Xλ​(y)=E[∫0T​Hλ​I1​(t,yHλ​)dt+Hλ​(T)I2​(yHλ​(T))] is finite for all y>0y>0y>0), let y=Yλ(x)y=\mathcal Y_\lambda(x)y=Yλ​(x) solve Xλ(y)=x\mathcal X_\lambda(y)=xXλ​(y)=x. The Mλ\mathcal M_\lambdaMλ​-optimal consumption, terminal wealth and wealth are cλ=I1(t,yHλ)c_\lambda=I_1(t,yH_\lambda)cλ​=I1​(t,yHλ​), ξλ=I2(yHλ(T))\xi_\lambda=I_2(yH_\lambda(T))ξλ​=I2​(yHλ​(T)) and XλX_\lambdaXλ​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10.1

Five conditions are considered for a capital x>0x>0x>0: (A) optimality of a pair (π^,c^)∈A′(x)(\hat\pi,\hat c)\in\mathcal A'(x)(π^,c^)∈A′(x), together with E[∫0Tc^U1′(t,c^) dt+X^(T)U2′(X^(T))]<∞E[\int_0^T\hat cU_1'(t,\hat c)\,dt+\hat X(T)U_2'(\hat X(T))]<\inftyE[∫0T​c^U1′​(t,c^)dt+X^(T)U2′​(X^(T))]<∞; and, for λ∈D′\lambda\in\mathcal D'λ∈D′, (B) financibility: some π^λ∈K\hat\pi_\lambda\in Kπ^λ​∈K with δ(λ)+π^λ∗λ=0\delta(\lambda)+\hat\pi_\lambda^*\lambda=0δ(λ)+π^λ∗​λ=0 finances (cλ,ξλ)(c_\lambda,\xi_\lambda)(cλ​,ξλ​) in M\mathcal MM; (C) minimality: Vλ(x)≤Vν(x)V_\lambda(x)\le V_\nu(x)Vλ​(x)≤Vν​(x) for all ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D, with Vλ(x)V_\lambda(x)Vλ​(x) attained by (cλ,ξλ)(c_\lambda,\xi_\lambda)(cλ​,ξλ​); (D) dual optimality: λ\lambdaλ minimizes ν↦E[∫0TU~1(t,yHν) dt+U~2(yHν(T))]\nu\mapsto E[\int_0^T\tilde U_1(t,yH_\nu)\,dt+\tilde U_2(yH_\nu(T))]ν↦E[∫0T​U~1​(t,yHν​)dt+U~2​(yHν​(T))] over D\mathcal DD; (E) parsimony: E[∫0THνcλ dt+Hν(T)ξλ]≤xE[\int_0^TH_\nu c_\lambda\,dt+H_\nu(T)\xi_\lambda]\le xE[∫0T​Hν​cλ​dt+Hν​(T)ξλ​]≤x for all ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D. The theorem asserts

(B)  ⟺  (C)  ⟺  (D)  ⟺  (E)  ⟹  (A) for (π^λ,cλ),(\mathrm B)\iff(\mathrm C)\iff(\mathrm D)\iff(\mathrm E)\implies(\mathrm A)\text{ for }(\hat\pi_\lambda,c_\lambda),(B)⟺(C)⟺(D)⟺(E)⟹(A) for (π^λ​,cλ​),

and, under the conditions (5.8) (c↦cU′(c)c\mapsto cU'(c)c↦cU′(c) nondecreasing), (8.25) (a uniform growth bound αU′(x)≥U′(γx)\alpha U'(x)\ge U'(\gamma x)αU′(x)≥U′(γx)) and (12.2) (finiteness of the dual functional for some ν\nuν), that (A) implies (B)–(E) for some λ∈D′\lambda\in\mathcal D'λ∈D′ with π^λ=π^\hat\pi_\lambda=\hat\piπ^λ​=π^.

Milestones

In proof order: the conjugate inequalities (5.5)–(5.6); the budget constraint (3.6); the unconstrained solution (Lemma 7.2, Proposition 7.3, Theorem 7.4); the embedding (8.14), V(x)≤Vν(x)V(x)\le V_\nu(x)V(x)≤Vν​(x); Proposition 8.3, (B) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ optimality; the constrained budget constraint (9.4) and the hedging Theorem 9.1, (E) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B); and Appendix A's Lemma A.1, Lemma A.2 and Proposition A.4, the steps of (A) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B).

Significance

Theorem 10.1 turns a constrained stochastic control problem into a family of unconstrained ones plus a minimization over the dual process λ\lambdaλ. Condition (D) is a convex minimization over ν\nuν that does not involve portfolios. It leads to the dual problem of Section 12, whose solvability gives existence of optimal constrained policies (Theorem 13.1, the companion mission). Section 9's hedging theorem is the superreplication principle under convex constraints, the basis of later work on constrained hedging and pricing. With logarithmic utility the theorem gives explicit optimal policies, and for deterministic coefficients the dual problem reduces to a deterministic one.

These results are proved in the paper, which is the standard reference for the convex-duality approach. To our knowledge they have no machine-checked proof. The mission's statements also produce a reusable Lean model of a continuous-time Itô market with stochastic coefficients, admissible portfolios, consumption, utility functions and their conjugates.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, Lagrange duality for max⁡J\max JmaxJ subject to π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K, fails at the first step: the constraint is on the control process, not on terminal wealth, so there is no static budget constraint to dualize. The paper's dual variable is a process, and for each candidate it changes both the interest rate and the drift. The direction (B) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (A) is relatively direct. The direction (E) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B) is a hedging theorem under convex constraints (Theorem 9.1), where financing a claim requires the portfolio to land in KKK and to satisfy the complementary-slackness identity δ(λ)+π∗λ=0\delta(\lambda)+\pi^*\lambda=0δ(λ)+π∗λ=0, which no unconstrained construction delivers. The converse (A) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B) must produce the dual process λ\lambdaλ from an optimal pair that is only assumed to exist, and the paper needs the extra growth conditions (5.8), (8.25), (12.2) for it. In Lean, stochastic integrals for integrands that are square integrable only almost surely, the martingale representation theorem for the Brownian filtration, and the product rule for Itô processes are not available in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

Processes are functions R≥0×Ω→E\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times\Omega\to ER≥0​×Ω→E constrained on [0,T][0,T][0,T]; vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), matrices Matrix (Fin d) (Fin d) ℝ. The Brownian motion is the published EthierKurtz.IsStandardBrownian. The stochastic integral is a binder I, constrained only by the standing hypothesis that it is an Itô integral for every locally square-integrable integrand. This almost-sure variant of EthierKurtz.HasBrownianItoIntegral uses the published dyadic step helpers itoStepValue and itoStepSum. The hypothesis is satisfiable, by the classical construction.

The following readings are explicit in the Lean.

  • Triples. Classes are sets of triples (π,c,X)(\pi,c,X)(π,c,X) with XXX a wealth process: an adapted, a.s. continuous solution of the integral form of (3.1) or (8.10) whose integrals exist.
  • Extended reals. Utility expectations are extended reals, computed as positive minus negative parts. A utility at 000 is U(0+)U(0+)U(0+). Suprema are taken in the extended reals.
  • The support function. δ\deltaδ takes values in the extended reals. In drifts and discounts it enters as a real number, which is finite almost everywhere for ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D. The page's "E∫δ(ν)≤∞E\int\delta(\nu)\le\inftyE∫δ(ν)≤∞" in (8.1) is read as "<∞<\infty<∞".
  • Inverse marginals and conjugates. I(y)=inf⁡{x>0:U′(x)≤y}I(y)=\inf\{x>0: U'(x)\le y\}I(y)=inf{x>0:U′(x)≤y} and U~(y)=sup⁡x>0(U(x)−xy)\tilde U(y)=\sup_{x>0}(U(x)-xy)U~(y)=supx>0​(U(x)−xy).
  • The inverse Yλ\mathcal Y_\lambdaYλ​. Yλ(x)\mathcal Y_\lambda(x)Yλ​(x) and Y0(x)\mathcal Y_0(x)Y0​(x) are represented by a number y>0y>0y>0 with X(y)=x\mathcal X(y)=xX(y)=x.
  • The wealth XλX_\lambdaXλ​. It is a conditional expectation for each ttt. "X=XλX=X_\lambdaX=Xλ​" means X(t)=Xλ(t)X(t)=X_\lambda(t)X(t)=Xλ​(t) a.s. for every t≤Tt\le Tt≤T.
  • Almost everywhere. "ℓ⊗P\ell\otimes Pℓ⊗P-a.e." is almost everywhere for the product of Lebesgue measure on [0,T][0,T][0,T] and PPP. "a.s." is almost everywhere for PPP.
  • Theorem 9.1. Its conclusion "(π,c)∈A′(x)(\pi,c)\in\mathcal A'(x)(π,c)∈A′(x)" is formalized as A0(x)\mathcal A_0(x)A0​(x) plus π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K a.e., since the theorem involves no utility.
  • (4.4). By Remark 4.2 it is not used in Theorem 10.1. It is kept, because the paper assumes it throughout.

A formalization in which the stochastic integral is an unconstrained function, a wealth process need not solve its equation, or δ\deltaδ is real-valued (so that sup⁡\supsup over an unbounded set returns 000) would make the statements vacuous or false; each is ruled out above. The proof will need almost-surely-square-integrable Itô integrals, Itô's product rule, nonnegative local martingales as supermartingales, and martingale representation in the Brownian filtration. All of these are reusable well beyond this mission, and contributions of any of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Cvitanić and I. Karatzas, Convex duality in constrained portfolio optimization, Ann. Appl. Probab. 2(4) (1992) 767–818. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005576
  • I. Karatzas, J. P. Lehoczky and S. E. Shreve, Optimal portfolio and consumption decisions for a "small investor" on a finite horizon, SIAM J. Control Optim. 25 (1987) 1557–1586. https://doi.org/10.1137/0325086
  • J. C. Cox and C. F. Huang, Optimal consumption and portfolio policies when asset prices follow a diffusion process, J. Econom. Theory 49 (1989) 33–83. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0531(89)90067-7
  • S. R. Pliska, A stochastic calculus model of continuous trading: optimal portfolios, Math. Oper. Res. 11 (1986) 371–382. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.11.2.371
  • I. Karatzas, J. P. Lehoczky, S. E. Shreve and G. L. Xu, Martingale and duality methods for utility maximization in an incomplete market, SIAM J. Control Optim. 29 (1991) 702–730. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329039
  • H. He and N. D. Pearson, Consumption and portfolio policies with incomplete markets and short-sale constraints: the infinite-dimensional case, J. Econom. Theory 54 (1991) 259–304. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0531(91)90123-L
  • I. Karatzas and S. E. Shreve, Brownian Motion and Stochastic Calculus, Springer, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-0302-2
21 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 8 of 9Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me